JP2017056084A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine with novel operation means in a game machine typically such as a pinball game machine (Pachinko machine) and a reel game machine (slot machine).SOLUTION: In the game machine, a performance button drive motor 434 drives a performance button 136 that a player can operate. The performance button drive motor 434 can displace the performance button 136 between an operable position and a non-operable position. When the performance button 136 is in a position different form the operable position at a timing before an operation promotion notification image is displayed, an initial position returning operation is conducted so that the performance button 136 is positioned in the operable position.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 52

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player such as paying out the prize ball (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In addition, such game machines are known that have operating means.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, in the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the operation means.

  In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in an operation means.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object is as follows.
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Driving means for driving the operating means;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
A game machine equipped with
The drive means is means capable of displacing the operation means between a first position and a second position;
One of the plurality of types of display is a display related to the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation display”),
The operation means is configured to be displaced to the first position when the operation means is at the second position at a timing before the display of the operation display is started.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming machine characterized by the operating means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 2, (c) is a decorative design (D) is a figure which shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and for special figures 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the content of the determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub control part command reception interruption. 4 is a flowchart of the process, (c) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit image control process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. (A) It is an example of the table of box data provided in RAM of the 1st sub control part, (b) It is an example of the table of parts data provided in RAM of the 1st sub control part. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the command transmission in the presentation control of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the command transmission in the presentation control of this embodiment. (A) is a flowchart of an effect system operation process, (b) is a flowchart of a chance button operation state determination process. It is a flowchart of various button operation related processing. It is a flowchart of various button operation related processing. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of button press. It is a flowchart of one time operation processing. It is a flowchart of one time operation processing. It is a flowchart of continuous hit operation processing. It is a flowchart of long press operation processing. It is a flowchart of other button operation processing. It is a flowchart of a setting display process at the time of determination button operation. It is a flowchart of a right button operation setting display process. (A) is a flowchart of a brightness | luminance setting display update process, (b) is a flowchart of a user brightness setting operation process. (A) is a flowchart of a volume setting display update process, (b) is a flowchart of a user volume setting operation process. It is a flowchart of a setting display process at the time of an upper button operation. (A) is a flowchart of a button long press process, (b) is a flowchart of a chance button long press operation state determination process. It is a flowchart of various button long press operation related processing. It is a figure which shows the operation key unit shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 34 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in another case following FIG.35 (q) in steps. (A) is a figure explaining an example of the operation result of each button in the stand-by state (customer waiting state) which does not perform symbol variation display, (b) is the operation result of each button during symbol variation display. It is a figure explaining an example, (c) is a figure explaining an example of the operation result of each button in a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating another effect example in the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating another effect example in the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining another example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of setting operation using a production button and an operation key unit. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using an effect button and an operation key unit. (A) is a timing chart explaining the relationship between the continuous operation by the effect button and the effect display during execution of the effect for repeated hitting, (B) by the effect button during the execution of the effect for repeated hitting It is a timing chart explaining the relationship between long press operation and effect display, (C) is a timing chart explaining the relationship between long press operation by the effect button and effect display during execution of the effect for long press. is there. (A) is a timing chart explaining the effect display when the long press operation by the effect button is intermittently performed during the execution of the effect for continuous hitting, and (B) is the execution of the effect for long press. It is a timing chart explaining the effect display at the time of performing long press operation by an effect button intermittently. It is a figure which shows in stepwise an example of the effect for repeated hits centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect for repeated hits centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect for long press centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 49 in steps. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing another effect example performed in the effect shown in FIG. 49. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the effect display in an ornamental symbol display apparatus, and operation | movement of an effect button. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the effect display in an ornamental symbol display apparatus, and operation | movement of an effect button.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106 as a door body, and a door with a ball storage tray. 108, the launcher 110, and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104 and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A shop clerk can also open and close the front frame door 106 and is provided with a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, an LED having a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing a release lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage tray which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage tray opened. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player A ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, an effect button 136 as an example of operation means for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation, and the effect button 1 6, a chance button lamp 138 for emitting the effect button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the amusement store, and a card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction to return the player's balance and a ball rental display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Furthermore, an operation key unit 137 as an example of an operation means is also provided, and the effect button 136 and each button of the operation key unit 137 are provided close to each other so that the player can operate with one hand. In the present embodiment, each button constituting the operation key unit 137 may be referred to as a first operation means, and the effect button 136 may be referred to as a second operation means.

  Here, a specific configuration of the operation key unit 137 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 shows the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the operation key unit 137 includes six buttons: an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, and a cancel button 137f. Each of these buttons is smaller than the production button 136, that is, the operation area is small. In other words, it can be said that the effect button 136 is larger in size than the up button 137a, the down button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, the enter button 137e, and the cancel button 137f.

  The effect button 136 includes an operable position (first position) protruding from the top surface of the door 108 with a ball storage tray and a door with a ball storage tray by an effect button drive motor 434 (see FIG. 4) as an example of a drive unit. It is possible to displace between the operation impossible position (second position) that enters the inside from the upper surface of 108. The effect button 136 can be pressed by the player at the operable position, and cannot be pressed by the player at the inoperable position. The effect button 136 may be configured to vibrate when operated.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is being manipulated.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in the rear view.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket passes through the tank rail 154 and temporarily flows into the payout device 152, and temporarily rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs overall game control processing, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 4) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch controller 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power source controller 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are configured. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by an operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on and outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300; In addition, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 operates the effect movable bodies 224 and 225 to produce effects, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. The closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3 as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The effect movable body 225 is formed in a circular shape imitating a family crest, is disposed on the back side of the game board 200, and can be moved in the vertical direction by a family crest motor (not shown). The effect movable body 225 can be displaced to a position where it is retracted above the decorative symbol display device 208 (retracted position) and a position where it overlaps on the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (advance position).

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable bodies 224 and 225, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to effect means, and among these, the decorative symbol display The device 208 corresponds to an example of display means or decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 representing the specifications of the game table is pasted at a position where it can be seen by the player.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 A payout control unit 600 that mainly performs control related to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are composed of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are: The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be a thing. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) combined. One can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one combined with the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means. Each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 includes a plurality of boards (for example, a plurality of control boards, one or more relay boards, and one or more control boards). It may be constituted by. Further, when the combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is regarded as sub-control means, in the pachinko machine 100 described here, the main control unit 300 and sub-control means (first sub-control) Unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500) are provided on separate boards, and the boards are directly connected by electric signal lines, but the electric signals between these boards are further connected by another relay board. The transmission / reception may be relayed.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing Yes. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308. In addition, various data representing predetermined information and the like are stored in the ROM 306 for each address, and when referred to as a table in the following description, a condition for determining which address in the ROM 306 is designated is displayed in a table format. May refer to a summary. The same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes three random value generation circuits). Lower body full sensor for detecting that the main body opening sensor, the front frame door sensor, the door sensor with a ball storage tray, and the lower tray 128 shown in FIG. A random number generation circuit that receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, a ball detection sensor provided inside each start opening, winning opening, and variable winning opening, and compares an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage. 318, a sensor circuit 322 for outputting to the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and the general-purpose display device 2 A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of 0, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general map hold lamp 216, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a high-accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) Is connected to a drive circuit 330 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the second special figure starting port 232, the variable winning port 234, and the like.

  The main control unit 300 is a game control unit that performs game control, and includes a success / failure determination unit, a start information prefetching unit, and a prior determination unit, which will be described later.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the sphere detection sensor among the various sensors 320 detects that the sphere has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to a random value generation circuit. Output to 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. Further, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the universal start port 228, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the general start port 228. Then, the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the normal start port 228 built in the random value generation circuit 318.

  In addition, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, a predetermined prize opening such as a general prize opening 226, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, a variable winning opening 234 or the like is won. And a sensor for detecting a sphere passing through the normal start port 228.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the control state) is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electric system abnormality signal output unit. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 may be provided in the power management unit 660.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control means.

  The main control unit 300 also includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an input / output interface for transmitting / receiving commands to / from the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Here, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. Further, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication, the main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600, and the payout control unit 600 is the main control unit. A signal corresponding to a command can be transmitted to 300. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. In addition, information communication between the main control unit 600 and the payout control unit 600 may be configured as one-way communication so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, an effect button 136 shown in FIG. The basic circuit 402 receives detection signals from a button sensor 426 that detects pressing of various buttons constituting the button 137 and an effect button initial position sensor 427 as detection means for detecting that the effect button 136 is located at the initial position. Sensor circuit 428 for output, upper arm motor and forearm motor for driving the effect movable body 224, drive circuit 430 for controlling the family crest motor for driving the effect movable body 225, and effect button drive for driving the effect button 136 A drive circuit 432 for controlling the motor 434 is connected. Here, the initial position of the effect button 136 is set to the above-described operable position, but is not limited thereto, and can be set to an appropriate position. For example, the initial position is set to the above-described inoperable position. You may make it do.

  Furthermore, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the first sub-control unit 400.

  The sub-control unit that combines the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 receives a command signal from the main control unit 300 that is a game control unit, and based on the received command signal, the decorative symbol display device The effect means such as 208 is controlled.

  Thus, the 1st sub control part 400 and the 2nd sub control part 500 are functioning as an example of production control means.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply management unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 mainly based on a signal such as a command transmitted from the main control unit 300, and awards based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. While detecting whether or not the payout of the ball or the rental ball has been completed, communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received a prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out, or has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. The ball rental information indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. The payout control unit 600 may be connected to a frame sensor (not shown). The frame sensor detects when the front frame door 106 and / or the main body 104 is open, and outputs an open signal. Here, the payout control unit 600 may output door opening information to the main control unit 300 when an opening signal from the frame sensor is input.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on the control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, the launcher 146 and the launcher motor 632 driving the launcher 148 shown in FIG. The device 634 is controlled.

  The power management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies the predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit 630 are supplied with a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. The power management unit 660 also stores a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power management unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special view 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special view 2 start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start-up sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been shot. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. FIG. FIG. 5 (a) shows nine types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure I”. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, which is a 15R probable big hit design that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot design. There are 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, and you can expect to get a lottery, but in the remaining rounds, you ca n’t expect to get a lottery. The special figure C is a 15R jackpot design. The 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in one round, and “Special E” is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in 4 rounds of the und, and “Special Figure F” is a 5R regular jackpot symbol. “G” is a 2R jackpot symbol, and is a 2R probability jackpot symbol referred to as a latent probability variation or a hidden probability variation that cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that directs the player in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to specify how long a round that can be expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit will continue. (9th or 9th round), it is a big hit that directs the player whether or not the round in which the player can expect to win the ball will continue.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable bonus jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where the state shifts to a short time state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined value in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It means a state. Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (short time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/100 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be long (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then closes for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, especially in a big hit game, a game ball is picked up by an electric Chu with a small number of winning balls, and if the winning of a game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, there may be a disadvantage to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (short time state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew releases is performed, the electric support state (short time state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which a game ball is easy to enter. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy-to-win state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. ) Is maintained and “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained during the special figure variable game 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is completed, Transition to support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without power support ("Special Figure G") is won, the game does not enter the power support state after the big hit game ends.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. When “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is ended. Further, when “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 second per operation. In the case of opening the door member 2341 at a small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If it does, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 5A is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing frequency and opening time) of the variable prize opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game to which the “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed. The number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, but may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. “Special Figure I” is a lost symbol.

  FIG.5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. FIG. In FIG. 5 (b), six types of special charts “Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f” are shown. Of these, five types of special charts are jackpot symbols (“Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f”). Fig. E "). “Special Figure a” is a 15R jackpot symbol, which is a 15R probable big hit symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to win in all of the rounds, and “Special Figure c” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and expects to win in 8 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected that 4 of the 15 rounds will have a ball. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a game, and “Special Figure e” is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying 5R probability big hit ("Special Figure B"), 5R normal big hit ("Special Figure F"), and 2R normal big hit ("Special Figure e"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with "Decoration". A combination of three decorative symbols having the same numbers other than “3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 1” Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Further, when 15R-RUB, 8R-RUB and 4R-RUB are notified, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are the same number of decorative symbols, and the middle symbol display area 208b A combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-donor-decoration 1”, “decoration 4-donor-decoration-4”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure G") or the small hit ("Special Figure H") that is a big hit of 2R, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as “3” is stopped. A combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol f, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described so far (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop symbol display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a decorative symbol variable display. The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop pattern aspect. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols of the “normal figure B” that is a symbol that is different from the “normal figure A” that is the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a long press automatic continuous hitting function for performing a pseudo continuous hitting operation by a long pressing operation of the effect button 136. Here, the long press operation is an operation mode in which the state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or longer, and the repeated operation is an effect button 136. This is an operation mode in which the pressing operation is performed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled or disabled according to the content of the effect using the effect button 136. In the present embodiment, in the state in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is valid, the continuous hitting operation at a constant interval (for example, an interval of 100 ms) is performed in a pseudo manner while the effect button 136 is continuously pressed. ing. Further, in the present embodiment, in the effect of performing a single pressing operation (single operation) with the effect button 136, the long press auto-strike function is performed by the effect button 136 in order to appropriately perform the single operation with the effect button 136. The pseudo continuous hitting operation is not started until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses after the pressing operation is started.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  A special figure random number value, a special figure round decision random value, a special figure electricity support decision random value, and a special symbol decision random number are stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. The RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of special figure hold, a special figure winning random value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a special information start information storage section divided into a maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery). A random number storage area is also provided for ordinary use. As will be described later, the special information start information storage unit stores a plurality of types of start information as one set and stores each start information in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 (indicating that there has been an operation). If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a random number value for a normal winning symbol provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various kinds of data are stored in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning openings 234 and 226 and these starting openings 230, 232 and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times coincides with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the first start opening sensor that detects a ball entering the first special view start opening 230, the first special view It is determined that a winning has been made at the starting port 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with the subsequent winning at the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning to the first special figure starting port 230 thereafter. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300 and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, symbols are displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210. Various types, including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time to fluctuate / stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 234, 226 and starting holes 230, 232 are won, the value of the number of prize balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning slot or each starting slot is stored. Read and add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of start information are acquired if predetermined conditions are satisfied. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the lost symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal state is not operating is set. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display random number is transmitted to the general-purpose display display device 210 from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general-purpose timer random number value. One time for variably displaying the figure is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored as a variably displayed time in a variably variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a break flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on. When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is on, any of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability variation flag is turned off, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special figure e is formed when the loss flag is turned on. 7 segment LED lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal jackpot symbol (special figure e), and lose symbol ( A fixed display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door member is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for maintaining the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 The information indicating the closing period is set in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example, 15 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the production waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Information indicating the production standby period is set in Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electric chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in gambling.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is performed in preference to a special figure variable game with a low advantage (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is determined (whether or not) whether to make a big hit, a small hit or a loss. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the change display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and a winning effect start command and an end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  Further, in the above rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes and special figures stored in the RAM 308 are stored as command data. 2. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, it becomes a HALT state.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 9A to 9C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 2, and pre-read is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special symbol I” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special symbol I” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure A" (15R probability variable big hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". "(Out of line) is stored.

  FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (4 in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing f” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 9B, a state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 9 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 9C, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, whether or not to determine the result, the variable timer number (variable time), a timer group to be described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch result Information can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  Next, refer to FIG. 10 for a table for determining whether or not there is a special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and a special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of the high / bad determination probability table, and FIG. 10B is a diagram illustrating an example of the low probability determination table. When determining whether or not the special figure 1 is true, if the special figure high probability state, refer to the high probability table for validity determination shown in FIG. 10A, and if the special figure low probability state, Reference is made to the success / failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referenced success / failure determination table and the acquired random number value, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit or a loss is selected as the determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the success / failure determination in FIG. 2, if it is in the special figure high probability state, it is in the special figure low probability state by referring to the high / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a). In this case, refer to the low / probability determination table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced determination table and the obtained random number value, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, the big hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  FIG. 10C shows an example of the small hit determination table. When the big hit determination result is out of place, the table for determining small hits shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit determining table and the acquired random number value. Then, the determination result of the special figure small hit lottery is selected. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected.

  Next, the stop that is performed based on the determination result or the like determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. A special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of the special symbol 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of special figure 1, refer to the special figure 1 table determination table shown in FIG. 11 (a), and based on the result of special figure 1 and the numerical range of random numbers, Select 1 stop symbol. In this embodiment, when the success / failure result of special figure 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special figures A to G, and when the success / failure determination result of special figure 1 is a small hit, When the special figure H is selected and the result of the special figure 1 is lost, the special figure I is selected.

  In addition, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11B, based on the result of special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The stop symbol of Special Figure 2 is drawn by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the result of special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of special figures a to e is selected, and when the result of special figure 2 is lost, a special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 according to the detection result is the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. Process to change to. In the chance button control process according to the present embodiment, if there is a command for operating the effect button 136 in the effect data read in step S409 or the updated effect data, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. To do.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S415 subsequent to step S413, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S417 following step S415, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when the instruction data to the effect movable bodies 224 and 225 is included in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 430.

  In step S419 following step S417, an information transmission process is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S441 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S443 following step S441, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S419) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S501 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S501. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S503 subsequent to step S501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. . In step S505, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S509 subsequent to step S507, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, the effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208 or effect data by the shielding device 246) corresponding to this command is read from a ROM (not shown). Processing is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

  In step S511 subsequent to step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP (not shown) in the effect data read in step S509, this command is output to the VDP (details will be described later).

  In step S513 subsequent to step S511, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S509, this command is output to a drive circuit (not shown) that drives the shielding device 246.

  In step S515 subsequent to step S513, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when the effect requested by the command of the first sub-control unit 400 is started or ended, a setting is made to output a control command for notifying the first sub-control unit 400 to that effect. Thereafter, the process returns to step S503.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S541 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S543 subsequent to step S541, transmission of a control command to the first sub-control unit 400 set in the information transmission process (step S515) of the second sub-control unit main process, and other processing random number update processing Etc.

  FIG. 13D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S551, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM (not shown). As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (ROM transfer source address), VRAM coordinates (VRAM transfer destination address) and the like in the VDP attribute register based on the position information table and the like, and then images from the ROM to the VRAM. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP transfers image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. If not (step S553: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S555, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM in step S551, the CPU stores information on the image data constituting the display image (VRAM coordinate axes, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP. The VDP performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the VDP to start drawing an image. The VDP starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU.

  In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes), The process proceeds to step S561, and if not (step S559: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S561, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  FIG. 14 is an example of a table provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 14A is an example of a box data table, and FIG. 14B is an example of a part data table. .

  The first sub-control unit 400 stores the box data shown in FIG. 5A in the box of the RAM 408 at the timing of each effect execution, such as when the change starts, when the change is held, when the notice effect is generated, when the reach effect is generated, or when the button effect is generated. Set in the data setting area. The box data is part data (parts A to H as an example here) composed of information such as a liquid crystal command and sound, light emission, and an accessory (movable body) executed in response to an effect based on the liquid crystal command. Etc. The liquid crystal command is a command for causing the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an effect display corresponding to each at the start of fluctuation, change on hold, notice effect, reach effect, button effect, etc. 101, 102, 201-203, etc.).

  Further, the liquid crystal command is in accordance with the operation of the corresponding accessory M (production movable bodies 246, 224, 225) at the time of start of fluctuation, change of hold, notice effect, reach effect, button effect, etc. For example, a command for box data such as No. 255.

  Specifically, in this example, no. The box data of 1 includes a liquid crystal command for starting a special figure change, a part A (data for storing a bumpy accessory), and a part B (data for storing a shutter). No. The box data 101 includes a liquid crystal command for displaying a saloon background and part C (effect data corresponding to the display of the saloon background). The box data 201 includes a liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 01 and part E (effect data corresponding to the conversation notice 01 (display of characters (殿) and “?”)). The box data 202 includes a liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 02, and parts E and F (effect data corresponding to the conversation notice 02 (character (princess) and character display of “How are you?”)). , No. The box data 203 includes a liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 03, and parts E and G (production data corresponding to the conversation notice 03 (character (princess) and character display!)!) No. The box data of 255 includes a liquid crystal command for moving up and down the forceful combination and a part H (data for up and down movement of the forceful combination).

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the part data includes the movable mode of the actors (production movable bodies 246, 224, 225, etc.) executed corresponding to each production, the output sound (sound) from the speaker 120, This is information on the light emission mode of the lamp L (various lamps 418 and the like).

  That is, each part data is composed of a sound layer having sound device data, a lamp layer having lamp device data, and an accessory action layer having shutter device data and accessory (movable body) device data. Here, a plurality of (two) sound layers, ramp layers, and accessory action layers are provided, and the higher the number of each layer, the higher the priority. Each part data may have one layer number and may have one device data number (or type).

  More specifically, in this example, the part A (data for storing the bicep feature is returned) to the initial position of the feature (effect movable body 224) that is bounced on the feature action layer 1 (bumpy action layer). Contains device data. Part B (data for storing the shutter) includes device data for returning the shutter accessory (production movable body (shielding means) 246) to the initial position in the accessory operation layer 2 (shutter accessory operation layer). Yes.

  Part C (production data corresponding to the display of the salon background) includes sound device data which is BGM for the salon background in the sound layer 1 and lamp device data of the light emission pattern for the salon background in the lamp layer 1. Yes.

  In addition, the part E (the production data corresponding to the conversation notice 01) includes the sound device data of the speech (such as “n?”) Generated by the character (dono) corresponding to the notice in the sound layer 2, and the lamp layer 2 It contains the lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice.

  In addition, the part F (the production data corresponding to the conversation notice 02) includes the sound device data of the line ("Genki?") From the character (princess) corresponding to the notice in the sound layer 2 and the notice in the lamp layer 2. The lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to is included.

  In addition, the part G (the production data corresponding to the conversation notice 03) is stored in the sound layer 2 in the sound device data of the line ("Gekiatsu!") Uttered by the character (princess) corresponding to the notice, and in the lamp layer 2. The lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice is included.

  Part H (data for up and down movement of the bicep feature) includes lamp device data of a light emission pattern corresponding to the up and down movement of the bicep on the lamp layer 2 and a combination action layer 1 (bicep feature movement layer). ) Includes device data for moving up and down the accessory (production movable body 224).

  Although not shown here, the storage position (position) of each part data is set in each box data. The position is arranged in a predetermined area of the RAM 408. In the box data 201, the start address (for example, address 1001) of the position 0001 is set as the storage position of the part E. For example, for example, No. In the box data 203, the start address (eg, address 1001) of position 0001 is set as the storage position of part E, and the start address (eg, address 1002) of position 0002 is set as the storage position of part G. ing.

  The first sub-control unit 400 sets the box data described above (for each effect) at the timing of execution of each effect, and transmits a liquid crystal command to the second sub-control unit 500. Each box data is set together when the first sub control unit 400 sets a liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500. At this time, the RAM 408 stores parts data at addresses (part data setting areas) corresponding to a plurality of positions. Note that parts data may not be stored in all of the plurality of positions.

  Further, the second sub-control unit 500 executes control for effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the liquid crystal command, and returns a command to the first sub-control unit 400. The return command includes position information, and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command sets the corresponding position in the RAM 408 when there is a position (part data) setting corresponding to the box data. In the case where the part data is stored, the control data of the sound of the sound layer, the light emission mode of the lamp layer, and the movable mode of the accessory operation layer of the part data is stored in each device or as necessary. It transmits to the sub-control unit 500 and performs an effect corresponding to the effect display.

  FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of command transmission in effect control according to the present embodiment, and is an example of displaying an image on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on a liquid crystal command.

  The first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect lottery process in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 12, and performs each effect according to the result. A control command is transmitted to 500.

  For example, when performing the presentation of the conversation notice 01, the first sub-control unit 400 gives the second sub-control unit 500 the No. 1 shown in FIG. A liquid crystal command of box data 201 is transmitted (1). In this example, the liquid crystal command includes a command for instructing the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image of the character (donor) and the character (“?”).

  When the first sub-control unit 400 sets the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, No. Based on the position set in the box data 201, the part data is stored at the corresponding address in the RAM 408. That is, in this example, no. Based on the position 0001 set in the box data 201, the part E is stored in the area of the RAM 408 having, for example, the address 1001 as the head address (1). As a result, in the area starting at address 1001 of the RAM 408, sound device data of a speech (for example, “n?” Etc.) emitted by the character (donor) corresponding to the conversation notice 01 and the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice Are stored.

  From the first sub-control unit 400, No. Upon receiving the liquid crystal command 201, the second sub-control unit 500 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display the effect of the conversation notice 01 (the character (donor) image and the character ("?") Characters (conversation notice 01). The second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command to the first sub-control unit 400 (2). The return command also includes position information, and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command corresponds to the part data when there is a position (part data) setting corresponding to the box data. The control data is set (3). In this example, since the return command includes information on position 0001, various device data (sound, lamp) corresponding to part E stored in position 0001 (area starting from address 1001) of RAM 408 are stored. L light emission mode) data is set and transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L, respectively, and the effect is executed (4). In addition, the presentation by the speaker 120 and the lamp L is actually after receiving a command from the main control unit 300, so a time lag occurs.

  FIG. 16 shows another example of displaying an image on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the liquid crystal command.

  For example, when performing the presentation of the conversation notice 03, the first sub-control unit 400 gives the second sub-control unit 500 the No. shown in FIG. A liquid crystal command of box data 203 is transmitted (1). In this example, the liquid crystal command includes a command for instructing the decorative symbol display device 208 to display a character (dono) image, a character (“?”) Character, and a character (princess) image, A command for instructing the display of the characters of the dialogue (“Gekiatsu!”) Is included.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 sets the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, No. Based on the position set in the box data 203, the part data is stored at the corresponding address in the RAM 408. That is, in this example, no. Based on the position 0001 set in the box data 203, the part E is stored in the area of the RAM 408 starting at address 1001, for example, No. Based on the position 0002 set in the box data 203, the part G is stored in the area of the RAM 408 having, for example, the address 1002 as the head address (1). As a result, the sound device data of the line (for example, “n?” Etc.) emitted by the character (dono) and the lamp device data of the corresponding light emission pattern are stored in the area starting at address 1001 of the RAM 408. In the area starting at address 1002 in the RAM 408, sound device data of a line ("Gekiatsu!") From a character (princess) and lamp device data of a corresponding light emission pattern are stored.

  From the first sub-control unit 400, No. Upon receiving the liquid crystal command 203, the second sub-control unit 500 displays the effect of the conversation notice 03 (the character (dono) image and the character (“?”)) On the decorative symbol display device 208 (conversation notice 03a). Display of the image of the character (princess) and the text of the dialogue (“Gekiatsu!”) (Display control of display of the conversation notice 03b)) is executed. Thereafter, the second sub control unit 500 transmits a return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03a to the first sub control unit 400 (2), and transmits a return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03b (3). . In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03a includes the position 0001 information in the return command. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 starts position 0001 (address 1001 at the head of the RAM 408). Various device data (sound, light emission mode of the lamp L) corresponding to the part E stored in the area (address area) is set and transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L, respectively, to execute the effect (4) . In addition, in this example, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03b includes the position 0002 information in the return command, so the position 0002 (address 1002 address) of the RAM 408 is included. The data of various device data (sound, light emission mode of the lamp L) corresponding to the part G stored in the area having the head address as the first address is set and transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L, respectively, to execute the effect ( 5).

  In this way, when one liquid crystal command is a command for instructing execution of a plurality of effect displays (display of conversation notice 03a and conversation notice 03b), and part data (parts E and G) are respectively set, The first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command corresponding to the display control for performing each display from the liquid crystal command, and uses the speaker 120 and the lamp L based on the part data (parts E and G) corresponding to each return command. Perform the production.

  Next, the production system operation process will be described. FIG. 17A is a flowchart of effect system operation processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This effect system operation process is a process executed in the chance button control process (step S411) of the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG.

  The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 first initializes the operation state of the operation means (step S601). That is, a process of clearing (port clearing) signals input from the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is performed. Subsequently, the CPU 404 clears the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S603).

  Thereafter, the CPU 404 executes a chance button operation state determination process (step S605).

  Here, the chance button operation state determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 as a chance button is operated (step S701). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 is operated by detecting the input state of the signal of the effect button 136 at the input port.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is operated (step S701: Yes), the operation state of the effect button 136 in the RAM 408 is updated to the input state (step S703).

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the current operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation (step S705). That is, it is determined whether or not the previous operation state of the effect button 136 is OFF and the current operation state of the effect button 136 is ON.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the current operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation (step S705: Yes), the CPU 404 turns on the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S707), and then ends this process. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the current operation of the effect button 136 is not the first operation (step S705: No), the CPU 404 ends this process without executing the process of step S707.

  If the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect button 136 is operated in step S701 (step S701: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the long press operation has ended (step S709). If the CPU 404 determines that the long press operation has ended (step S709: Yes), a box data table related to release of the long press is set (step S711). As a result, a liquid crystal command indicating that the long press is released is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, whereby the decorative symbol display device 208 displays, for example, a chance button indicating an effect button 136. An effect (effect) display may be performed to the effect that the long press has been canceled for the image. It should be noted that the effect display of the long press release in the long press effect and the effect display of the long press release during the long press automatic continuous hit may be different or the same. Furthermore, according to the return command from the second sub-control unit 500, according to the part data corresponding to the set box data table, the sound effect output by the speaker 120 and various lamps 418 according to the effect display of the long press release. Blinking may be performed to enhance the production effect.

  If the CPU 404 does not determine in step S709 that the long press operation has ended (step S709: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S711.

  Returning to FIG. 17A, after executing the chance button operation state determination process, the CPU 404 determines a determination button operation state determination process (step S607), a left button operation state determination process (step S609), and a right button operation state determination. Processing (step S611), up button operation state determination processing (step S613), and down button operation state determination processing (step S615) are sequentially executed. The contents of the determination button operation state determination process, the left button operation state determination process, the right button operation state determination process, the upper button operation state determination process, and the lower button operation state determination process are the same as the chance button operation state determination described above. Since it is the same as the processing, detailed description is omitted.

  Thereafter, the CPU 404 executes various button operation related processes (step S617), and then ends this process.

  Next, various button operation-related processes executed in the production system operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of various button operation-related processes executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, and FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the various button operation-related processes shown in FIG.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 is ON (step S801). When the initial operation flag is not ON (step S801: No), the CPU 404 ends this process. However, when the initial operation flag is ON (step S801: Yes), the various buttons (the effect button 136, the operation key). Assuming that the pressing operation of the unit 137) is performed, the power saving state during the customer waiting demonstration is canceled (step S803). The power saving state is configured to shift when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses without a symbol variation display or various button pressing operations after a standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed, for example. Specifically, the power consumption of the pachinko machine 100 is reduced by turning off the various lamps 418 or reducing the brightness, or reducing the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the power saving state may not be entered. The power-saving state is released when one of the various buttons is operated, but the power-saving state can be released even when two or more buttons are operated simultaneously. Alternatively, the power saving state may not be canceled when two or more buttons are operated simultaneously. Further, the power saving state may be canceled only when only one button is operated for a certain time (for example, 0.5 seconds).

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button (chance button) 136 is operated alone (step S805). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is operated alone (step S805: Yes), the button 404 is executed (step S807), and the process is terminated. Details of the button pressing process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect button 136 is operated alone (step S805: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the determination button 137e is operated alone (step S809). If the CPU 404 determines that the enter button 137e is operated alone (step S809: Yes), it executes a button press-down process to be described later (step S811), and then executes the enter button operation setting display process. (Step S813), this process ends. The detailed contents of the setting display process at the time of operating the enter button will be described later.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the determination button 137e is operated alone (step S809: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the right button 137d is operated alone (step S815). When the CPU 404 determines that the right button 137d is being operated alone (step S815: Yes), it executes a button pressing process (to be described later) (step S817), and then executes a right button operation setting display process. (Step S819), this process is terminated. Details of the right button operation setting display process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the right button 137d is operated alone (step S815: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the left button 137c is operated alone (step S821). If the CPU 404 determines that the left button 137c is being operated alone (step S821: Yes), it executes a button press process (to be described later) (step S823), and then executes a left button operation setting display process. (Step S825), the process ends. The detailed contents of the left button operation setting display process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the left button 137c is operated alone (step S821: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S827). If the CPU 404 determines that the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S827: Yes), it executes a button pressing process described later (step S829), and then executes an upper button operating setting display process. (Step S831), this process ends. The detailed contents of the upper button operation setting display process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S827: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the lower button 137b is operated alone as shown in FIG. Step S833). When the CPU 404 determines that the down button 137b is operated alone (step S833: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the button press processing described later (step S835), and then executes the down button operation setting display processing. (Step S837), this process ends. The detailed contents of the down button operation setting display process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the down button 137b is operated alone (step S833: No), the CPU 404 determines whether both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S839). . If the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are being operated (step S839: Yes), it executes a button pressing process described later (step S841), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S839: No), the CPU 404 determines whether both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated. (Step S843). If it is determined that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated (step S843: Yes), the CPU 404 executes a button pressing process described later (step S845), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated (step S843: No), the CPU 404 determines whether all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated. Is determined (step S847). If the CPU 404 determines that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are being operated (step S847: Yes), it executes a button pressing process described later (step S849), and then performs this process. Exit. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated (step S847: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S849. .

  Next, button pressing processing executed in various button operation related processing and various button long press operation related processing described later will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of button pressing processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not an effect receiving an operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is being executed (step S901). If the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect during operation acceptance is being executed (step S901: No), the CPU 404 ends this process, and if it determines that the effect during operation acceptance is being executed (step S901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for a single operation of the button (step S903). The effect determined here is not limited to the effect that actually presses the button. For example, the effect that prompts the button to be pressed is not performed, but a predetermined button (for example, When there is an operation of an effect button 136 or the like, an effect that is a state in which a predetermined effect (back button effect) is executed is also included.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for a single operation of the button (step S903: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S917 after executing the operation process once (step S905). . Here, the condition for determining that the effect being executed is an effect for a single operation of the button includes that the pressed button is a button for which an operation is requested in the effect being executed. For example, when an effect requesting a single operation of the effect button 136 is being executed, the effect being executed is an effect for a single operation of the button on the condition that the effect button 136 has been operated once. It is comprised so that it may determine. Detailed contents of the one-time operation process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect for a single operation of the button (step S903: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for repeatedly hitting the button. (Step S907). The effect determined here is not limited to the effect that actually prompts the button to be repeatedly hit. For example, the effect that prompts the button to be hit repeatedly is not performed, but a predetermined button (for example, An effect that is a state in which a predetermined effect (back button continuous hit effect) is executed when the repeat operation of the effect button 136 or the like is performed is also included.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for repeated button hits (step S907: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S917 after executing the hitting operation process (step S909). Here, the condition for determining that the effect being executed is an effect for repeated hitting of the button includes that the pressed button is a button for which an operation is requested in the effect being executed. When an effect requesting repeated operation of the effect button 136 is being executed, it is determined that the effect being executed is an effect for repeatedly pressing the button on condition that the effect button 136 is operated once. It is configured as follows. The detailed contents of the continuous hit operation process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the effect that is being executed is not an effect for repeatedly hitting a button (step S907: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect that is being executed is an effect for long-pressing the button ( Step S911). The effect determined here is not limited to an effect that actually prompts the user to press and hold the button. For example, an effect that prompts the user to press and hold the button is not performed, but a predetermined button ( For example, when a long press operation of an effect button 136 or the like is performed, an effect that is a state in which a predetermined effect (back button long press effect) is executed is also included.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for long-pressing the button (step S911: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S917 after executing the long-press operation process (step S913). Here, the condition for determining that the effect being executed is an effect for long press of the button includes that the pressed button is a button for which an operation is requested in the effect being executed, For example, when an effect requiring a long press operation of the effect button 136 is being executed, the effect being executed is an effect for long-pressing the button on condition that the effect button 136 has been operated once. It is comprised so that it may determine. Details of the long press operation process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect for long-pressing the button (step S911: No), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S917 after executing the other button operation processing (step S915). . The detailed contents of the other button operation processing will be described later.

  In step S917, the CPU 404 transmits, to the second sub-control unit 500, a liquid crystal command corresponding to the box set in the one-time operation process, continuous hit operation process, long press operation process, or other button operation process, as described later. After (step S917), this process is terminated.

  Next, the single operation process executed in the button pressing process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of a one-time operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, and FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the one-time operation process.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect of a single operation by the effect button 136 (step S1001). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect of the single operation by the effect button 136 (step S1001: Yes), the CPU 404 sets a chance button operation box for executing the effect that the chance button has been operated. After the button operation flag in the RAM 408 is turned on (step S1005), the process of step S1031 shown in FIG. 22 is executed. In this process, when other buttons are simultaneously operated in addition to the effect button 136, the operation of the effect button 136 is treated as invalid, but treated as valid. It may be.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect of the single operation by the effect button 136 (step S1001: No), the effect being executed is an effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. It is determined whether or not (step S1007). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d (step S1007: Yes), a box corresponding to the operated button is set (step S1009). . For example, when the effect button 136 is operated, a chance button operation box for executing an effect indicating that the chance button is operated is set. When the right button 137d is operated, the right button 137d is set. When the right button operation box for executing the effect of the operation is set and both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are both operated. A button operation box for executing the production is set. In this process, in addition to the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, when other buttons (for example, the upper button 137a) are operated simultaneously, the operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d itself is invalid. However, it may be handled as effective. Further, in this process, the effect may be performed only when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. In this case, any one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated. Even if the button operation box corresponding to the button operation is not set, the button operation box is set when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S1011). When the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S1011: Yes), the CPU 404 sets the button operation flag in the RAM 408 to ON (step S1013), and then the step shown in FIG. The process of S1031 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are not operated (step S1011: No), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1031 without executing the process of step S1013. A button operation flag is set for each button. For example, when only the effect button 136 is operated, the button operation flag of the effect button 136 is turned ON and the button operation flag of the right button 137d is OFF. Alternatively, the two button operation flags may be turned on to execute processing in step S1033 described later.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S1007 that the effect being executed is not the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d (step S1007: No), the effect being executed is the effect button 136 and the left button. It is determined whether or not the simultaneous operation of 137c is performed (step S1015). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c (step S1015: Yes), a box corresponding to the operated button is set (step S1017). . For example, when the effect button 136 is operated, a chance button operation box for executing an effect indicating that the chance button is operated is set. When the left button 137c is operated, the left button 137c is set. When the left button operation box for executing the effect indicating that the operation has been performed is set and both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated, both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated. A button operation box for executing the production is set. In this process, in addition to the effect button 136 and the left button 137c, when other buttons (for example, the lower button 137b) are operated at the same time, the operations of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are invalid. However, it may be handled as effective. Further, in this process, the effect may be performed only when both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated. In this case, any one of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c is operated. Even if the button operation box corresponding to the button operation is not set, the button operation box is set when both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated (step S1019). If the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated (step S1019: Yes), the CPU 404 turns on the button operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1021), and then the steps shown in FIG. The process of S1031 is executed. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are not operated (step S1019: No), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1031 without executing the process of step S1021. A button operation flag is set for each button. For example, when only the effect button 136 is operated, the button operation flag of the effect button 136 is turned ON, and the button operation flag of the left button 137c is OFF. Alternatively, the two button operation flags may be turned on to execute processing in step S1033 described later.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S1015 that the effect being executed is not an effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c (step S1015: No), the effect being executed is shown in FIG. Is determined to be a simultaneous operation effect of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d (step S1023). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d (step S1023: Yes), a box corresponding to the operated button is set. (Step S1025). For example, when the effect button 136 is operated, a chance button operation box for executing an effect indicating that the chance button is operated is set. When the left button 137c is operated, the left button 137c is set. When the left button operation box for executing the effect that the operation is performed is set and the right button 137d is operated, the right button operation box for executing the effect that the right button 137d is operated is displayed. Set. Further, when both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated, a button operation box for executing the effect that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated is set, and the effect button 136 is set. When both the right button 137d and the right button 137d are operated, a button operation box for executing the effect that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated is set, and the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and When all of the right buttons 137d are operated, a button operation box for executing an effect that all of the effect buttons 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated is set. In this process, when other buttons (for example, the enter button button 137e) are simultaneously operated in addition to the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d, the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated. In addition, the operation of the right button 137d is handled as invalid, but it may be handled as valid. Further, in this process, the effect may be performed only when all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated. In this case, the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are performed. Even if any one or two of the buttons are operated, the button operation box corresponding to the button operation is not set, and the button operation box is operated when all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated. Is configured to be set.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d have been operated (step S1027). If the CPU 404 determines that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated (step S1027: Yes), the CPU 404 sets the button operation flag in the RAM 408 to ON (step S1029), and then step S1031. Execute the process. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are not operated (step S1027: No), the process of step S1031 is performed without executing the process of step S1029. Run. A button operation flag is set for each button. For example, when only the effect button 136 is operated, the button operation flag of the effect button 136 is turned ON, and the button operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d is performed. For example, the processing in step S1033 described later may be executed when the three button operation flags are turned on, for example, by leaving the flag off.

  In step S1031, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the button operation flag in the RAM 408 is ON (step S1031). If the CPU 404 determines that the button operation flag is ON (step S1031: Yes), it executes an operation valid period end process (step S1033), and then ends this process. Specifically, the CPU 404 performs processing for ending the operation effective period even before the operation effective period ends, and then sets a box for ending the effect of accepting the button operation. Based on the set box, the CPU 404 transmits a liquid crystal command for ending acceptance of the button operation to the second sub-control unit 500. Then, in the second sub control unit 500, after displaying that the acceptance of the button operation is finished, a return command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. In addition, when the reception of the button operation is continued until the operation effective period ends, the process for ending the operation effective period may not be performed.

  Next, the continuous hitting operation process executed in the button pressing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the continuous hitting operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for continuous hitting by the effect button 136 (step S1101). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect for repeated hits by the effect button 136 (step S1101: No), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for repeated hits by the effect button 136 (step 1101: Yes), the CPU 404 performs lottery effect lottery and sets the result (step S1103). Specifically, for example, whether or not to increase the continuous hitting meter displayed in the directing effect for prompting the player to repeatedly hit the effect button 136, and in the case of increasing the increase, the increase amount is determined by lottery. Set the box according to the result. Then, a liquid crystal command corresponding to the increasing amount of the continuous hitting meter is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an increase display of the repeated hitting meter in a manner corresponding to the liquid crystal command (0th embodiment) ).

  Here, the example applicable about the aspect of lottery effect lottery is demonstrated.

(First form)
The comparison time C set according to the elapsed time T from the start of the operation valid period may be compared with the interval at which the player operates the button to determine whether the operation is valid or invalid. For example, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is 12 seconds and the elapsed time T is less than 4 seconds, the comparison time C is set to 0.5 seconds, and finally the effect button 136 is operated. Until 0.5 seconds elapse, it is determined that the operation of the effect button 136 is invalid, and it is determined to be effective when the operation of the effect button 136 is performed after 0.5 seconds have elapsed. When the elapsed time T is 4 seconds or more and less than 8 seconds, the comparison time C is set to 0.3 seconds, and until 0.3 seconds have passed since the last time the effect button 136 was operated, Even if the button 136 is operated, it is determined to be invalid, and it is determined to be valid when the production button 136 is operated after 0.3 seconds have elapsed. When the elapsed time T is 8 seconds or more, the comparison time C is set to 0.1 second, and the effect button 136 is not operated until 0.1 seconds have passed since the last time the effect button 136 was operated. Even if there is an operation, it is determined to be invalid, and it is determined to be valid if the effect button 136 is operated after 0.1 seconds have elapsed.

(Second form)
In addition, the comparison time C set according to the elapsed time T from the start of the operation effective period until the first player operation is performed is compared with the interval at which the player operates the effect button 136. The invalidity may be determined. For example, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is 12 seconds and the elapsed time T is less than 4 seconds, the operation of the effect button 136 is enabled at intervals of 0.5 seconds, and at other timings. Disable operation. When the elapsed time T is 4 seconds or more and less than 8 seconds, the operation of the effect button 136 is validated at intervals of 0.3 seconds from the initial operation, and the operations at other timings are invalidated. When the elapsed time T is 8 seconds or more, the operation of the effect button 136 is validated at intervals of 0.1 seconds from the initial operation, and the operations at other timings are invalidated.

(Third form)
In addition, in the effect lottery of the operation effect that can perform the continuous hit operation or the long press automatic continuous hit operation (continuous hit effect lottery), the progress pattern of the effect of the continuous hit effect is larger than the progress pattern of the effect of the long press automatic hit ( For example, while the amount of increase in the continuous hitting meter reaches 70% of the entire meter by the operation on the fifth floor in the continuous hitting operation, if the liquid crystal command is not transmitted 7 times in the long press automatic hitting, it does not increase to 70% of the entire meter. Or the like, or vice versa.

(4th form)
Further, the increase amount due to the continuous hitting operation and the long press automatic continuous hitting operation changes with the passage of the operation effective period (for example, the increase amount increases / decreases as the operation effective period elapses). May be.

(5th form)
Further, the remaining after the end of the determination period in the operation effective period, depending on the number of times that the effect button 136 is operated during a predetermined determination period (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of the operation effective period (for example, 10 seconds) of the continuous hit effect It may be configured to select a lottery table that determines whether or not to execute an effect according to an operation in a period (for example, 8 seconds), and perform an effect execution lottery based on the selected lottery table. When winning by lottery, an effect according to the operation is executed, and when not winning, an effect according to the operation may not be performed. More specifically, for example, when the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the determination period is five or more, a low probability lottery table with a low probability of winning in the effect execution lottery is set, and the operation of the effect button 136 in the determination period is set. If the number of times is less than 5, setting a high-probability lottery table with a high probability of winning in the production execution lottery may make it possible to fully enjoy the production contents even for players who are not good at continuous hitting operations. . On the other hand, if the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the determination period is 5 or more, a high probability lottery table is set. If the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the determination period is less than 5, the low probability lottery table is set. Thus, there may be a case where a player who has actively performed a continuous hitting operation can be more entertained. In the determination period, it may be determined by lottery whether or not an effect corresponding to the operation is performed. In this case, the lottery table referenced in the predetermined period may be the same as or different from any of the lottery tables referenced in the remaining period. Further, effects may be performed according to all operations. In this case, in the production according to the operation performed in the determination period, for example, the production can be performed until the meter reaches a threshold value (for example, the meter can be increased to a certain value). Also good. Here, the lottery table described above is a table for lottery of whether or not the performance can be performed. However, the lottery table may be configured to determine the amount of change in the performance by lottery.

(Sixth form)
Further, in an effect that operates one or a plurality of buttons with good timing (sometimes referred to as “timing operation effect”) in the operation effective period, an effect period (may be an operation effective period, for example, 15 seconds). The remaining period (for example, the number of times the button is operated in a timely manner during the predetermined determination period (for example, 5 seconds) from the start (the number of times the button is operated during the period in which the operation timing of the corresponding button is determined to be good) The operation valid period of the timing operation effect in 10 seconds may be determined. For example, when the number of button operations with good timing during the determination period is 3 or more, the period during which the operation timing of the corresponding button is determined to be good is the first determination period, and the timing is good during the determination period If the number of button operations is less than 3 and the second judgment period is the period during which the appropriate button operation timing is judged to be good, the second judgment period is more than the first judgment period. By setting a long time, there may be a case where the content of the performance can be fully enjoyed even by a player who is not good at timing operations. On the other hand, by setting the first determination period longer than the second determination period, there are cases where a player who is good at timing operations can be more entertained. Further, the period during which the operation timing of the corresponding button in the determination period is determined to be good may be the same as or different from either the first determination period or the second determination period. Here, when the operation timing of the corresponding button in the determination period is set longer than the first determination period and the second determination period, the player can practice the timing operation in the determination period. In some cases, it is possible to make it easier for a player to participate in an operation effect. On the other hand, when the operation timing of the corresponding button in the determination period is set shorter than both the first determination period and the second determination period, the operation becomes easier as the timing operation effect progresses, so the timing operation is gradually increased. You may be able to feel that you have improved. Further, when the operation timing of the corresponding button in the determination period is set between the first determination period and the second determination period, the timing operation effect can be determined according to the skill of the player, May be able to satisfy both players who are not good at and players who are good at timing operations.

  In the present embodiment, the present invention may be applied only to any one of the 0th to 6th forms, and a plurality of types of effects for continuous hitting are prepared, and the mode is implemented according to the type of effects for consecutive hitting. May be different.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 sets a chance button operation box for executing an effect indicating that the effect button (chance button) 136 has been operated (step S1105). Then, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the operation of the effect button 136 is an initial operation based on the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1107). That is, it is determined whether or not the production button 136 has been started.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation (step S1107: Yes), after setting the time T1 until the next automatic liquid crystal command transmission is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 ( In step S1109), this process ends. In the present embodiment, the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is set to 500 ms, for example, but can be set to an arbitrary time. As a result, when the long press for the time T1 is performed during the execution of the effect for continuous hitting, the effect can be performed as if the effect button 136 was pressed without pressing the button again. Yes.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is not the first operation, that is, if it is determined that the long press automatic continuous hitting is being performed (step S1107: No), then the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted. After setting the time T2 to be set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 (step S1111), this process is terminated. The time T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is 100 ms in this embodiment, for example, but can be set to an arbitrary time. As a result, when the long press is continuously maintained and the time T2 elapses during execution of the effect for continuous hitting, the effect can be performed as if the effect button 136 was pressed without pressing the button again. It has become.

  The continuous hit operation processing in this embodiment is executed only for the continuous hit operation effect by the effect button 136, but each button (up button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, determination) of the operation key unit 137 is determined. The continuous hitting operation process may be executed for the button 137e).

  Next, the long press operation process executed in the button press process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the long press operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for long press by the effect button 136 (step S1201). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect for long press by the effect button 136 (step S1201: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for long press by the effect button 136 (step 1201: Yes), the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation based on the initial operation flag in the RAM 408. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the production button 136 has been started.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation (step S1203: Yes), the CPU 404 sets a time T3 until a long press liquid crystal command is transmitted in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 (step S1205). ), This process is terminated. The time T3 until the long press liquid crystal command is transmitted is, for example, 100 ms in this embodiment, but can be set to an arbitrary time. Thereby, during the execution of the effect for long press, the effect can be performed as if the long press of the effect button 136 is started by performing the long press for the time T3.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is not the first operation, that is, when it is determined that the effect button 136 is being pressed (step S1203: No), the effect button (chance button) 136 is operated. A chance button operation box for executing the effect is set (step S1207). Then, after setting the time T4 until the long press liquid crystal command is transmitted to a predetermined area of the RAM 408 (step S1209), the process is terminated. The time T4 until the long press liquid crystal command is transmitted is set to, for example, 231 ms in this embodiment, but can be set to an arbitrary time. Thus, during the execution of the effect for long press, when the long press is continued and time T4 has elapsed, it is possible to perform an effect in which the long press of the effect button 136 is maintained. The time T4 set in step S1209 is configured to be set to the same time (231 ms) every time in the present embodiment, but the time set may be changed every time it is set.

  The long press operation processing in this embodiment is executed for the long press operation effect by the effect button 136, but each button of the operation key unit 137 (up button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, You may make it perform a long press operation process about the determination button 137e).

  Next, other button operation processing executed in the button press processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of other button operation processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not it is an operation of the enter button 137e of the operation key unit 137 (step S1301). If the CPU 404 determines that the operation is an operation of the determination button 137e (step S1301: Yes), after setting the determination button pressing box for executing the effect that the determination button 137e has been operated (step S1303), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when determining that the operation is not an operation of the determination button 137e (step S1301: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the operation is an operation of the right button 137d (step S1305). When the CPU 404 determines that the operation is the operation of the right button 137d (step S1305: Yes), after setting the right button pressing box for executing the effect that the right button 137d is operated (step S1307), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when determining that the operation is not the operation of the right button 137d (step S1305: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the operation is the operation of the left button 137c (step S1309). If the CPU 404 determines that the operation is the operation of the left button 137c (step S1309: Yes), after setting the left button pressing box for executing the effect that the left button 137c has been operated (step S1311), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when determining that the operation is not the operation of the left button 137c (step S1309: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the operation is an operation of the upper button 137a (step S1313). If the CPU 404 determines that the operation is an operation of the upper button 137a (step S1313: Yes), after setting the upper button pressing box for executing the effect that the upper button 137a has been operated (step S1315), This process ends. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the operation is not the operation of the upper button 137a (step S1313: No), it is determined that the operation is the operation of the lower button 137b, and the lower button is pressed to execute the effect that the lower button 137c is operated. After setting the box (step S1317), this process ends.

  Next, a determination button operation setting display process executed in various button operation related processes will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the setting display process at the time of the determination button operation executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not a power-on related process is being executed (step S1401). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not it is from when the power is turned on until the display during return ends. If the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is being executed (step S1401: No), this process ends. In the present embodiment, a volume setting screen and a brightness setting screen, which will be described later, are not displayed during the period from when the power is turned on until the display during restoration ends. Note that the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen may be displayed and the volume setting and the brightness setting may be performed during the period from when the power is turned on until the display during restoration ends.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related processing is not being executed (step S1401: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether the setting display is not displayed (step S1403). That is, the CPU 404 does not display the volume setting screen or the brightness setting screen as shown in FIG. 42E in the standby state where the symbol variation display is not performed, during the symbol variation display, during the big hit game, or the like. It is determined whether or not it is in a state. When the CPU 404 determines that the setting display is not displayed (step S1403: Yes), the CPU 404 ends the process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting display is displayed (step S1403: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S1405). Specifically, for example, the CPU 404 clearly or suggests to the player that the volume and brightness can be set by operating the operation key unit 137 during the customer waiting demonstration displayed in the standby state. It is determined whether an icon is displayed. Even when such an icon is not displayed, the processing in step S1405 is not necessary if the volume setting screen or the brightness setting screen is displayed if there is a predetermined operation. If the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S1405: Yes), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is not displayed (step S1405: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S1407). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not a brightness setting screen for displaying the current brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the various lamps 418 and the set brightness is displayed. In the present embodiment, the brightness setting screen is configured to be displayed by operating the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b. Note that when the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen described later are displayed at the same time, the type of setting screen to be displayed may not be divided depending on the type of button. This brightness setting screen is deleted when a predetermined display time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses without operating the buttons of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. If the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S1407: Yes), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen as it is (step S1409), and then ends this process. That is, the CPU 404 resets the display time for maintaining the display of the brightness setting screen. Here, the liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen as it is may be a command for resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and resetting the count of the predetermined display time. However, it may be a command for continuing the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time as it is.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is not displayed (step S1407: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1411). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not a volume setting screen for displaying the current volume of the sound output from the speaker 120 and the set volume is displayed. In the present embodiment, the volume setting screen is configured to be displayed by operating the left button 137c or the right button 137d. This volume setting screen is deleted when a predetermined display time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses without operating the buttons of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. If the CPU 404 determines that the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1411: Yes), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen as it is (step S1413), and then ends this process. That is, the CPU 404 resets the display time for maintaining the display of the volume setting screen. Here, the liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen as it is may be a command for resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and resetting the count of the predetermined display time. However, it may be a command for continuing the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time as it is.

  On the other hand, when determining that the volume setting screen is not displayed (step S1411: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the symbol variation setting screen is displayed (step S1415). Specifically, for example, the CPU 404 determines whether or not a volume setting screen or a luminance setting screen displayed during the symbol variation display is displayed. If the CPU 404 determines that the symbol variation setting screen is displayed (step S1415: Yes), it sets a liquid crystal command to hide the setting screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Later (step S1417), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the symbol variation setting screen is not displayed (step S1415: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S1417.

  Next, right button operation setting display processing executed in various button operation related processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of right button operation setting display processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The left button operation setting display process executed in the various button operation related processes is the same as the right button operation setting display process, and therefore the description of the right button 137d is replaced with the description of the left button 137c. As a matter of course, the description is omitted.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not a power-on related process is being executed (step S1501). If the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is being executed (step S1501: No), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is not being executed (step S1501: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether the setting display is not displayed (step S1503). When it is determined that the setting display is not displayed (step S1503: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the setting display is in a non-demo state (step S1505). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the customer waiting demonstration display is being performed in the standby state. If the CPU 404 determines that it is in the non-demo state (step S1505: Yes), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the symbol variation setting screen (step S1507), and then ends this process. That is, the CPU 404 sets a liquid crystal command for displaying a volume setting screen displayed during the symbol variation display. A brightness setting screen may be displayed together with the volume setting screen. Further, only the brightness setting screen may be displayed, or a setting screen other than the volume and brightness may be displayed.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that it is not in the non-demo state (step S1505: No), after setting a liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen (step S1509), the process is terminated.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S1503 that the setting display is not hidden (step S1503: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S1511). If the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S1511: YES), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen (step S1513), and then ends this process. .

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is not displayed (step S1511: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S1515). If the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S1515: Yes), it executes the brightness setting screen update process (step S1517), and then ends this process. In the present embodiment, when the right button 137d (left button 137c) is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness setting is performed, but the right button 137d (left button 137c) is set. In this case, the luminance setting may not be performed. Details of the brightness setting screen update process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is not displayed (step S1515: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1519). If the CPU 404 determines that the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1519: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the volume setting screen update process (step S1521), and ends this process. Details of the volume setting screen update process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when determining that the volume setting screen is not displayed (step S1519: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the symbol variation setting screen is displayed (step S1523). If the CPU 404 determines that the symbol variation setting screen is displayed (step S1523: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the volume setting screen update processing (step S1525), and then ends this processing. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the symbol variation setting screen is not displayed (step S1523: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S1525.

  Next, the brightness setting display update process executed in the right button operation setting display process and the left button operation setting display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28A is a flowchart of the brightness setting display update process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 executes user brightness setting operation processing (step S1601). Here, the details of the user brightness setting operation process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28B is a flowchart of the user brightness setting setting operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 acquires the value of the luminance volume knob (step S1701). Specifically, for example, based on a signal output from a luminance volume knob (not shown) provided on the first sub-board 160, the value indicated by the luminance volume knob is acquired. The luminance volume knob is, for example, a knob for changing the luminance by a game clerk. That is, the luminance volume knob can be said to be a volume knob for performing luminance master setting. Note that the luminance volume knob may not be provided, and in this case, the process as in step S1701 may not be executed. Also, one volume knob may be provided, and the function of the volume volume knob and the function of the luminance volume knob, which will be described later, may be unified by this volume knob.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the value of the brightness volume knob is 0 (step S1703). If the CPU 404 determines that the value of the brightness volume knob is 0 (step S1703: YES), it executes the process of step S1715. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the value of the brightness volume knob is not 0 (step S1703: No), it determines whether or not the current operation is an operation to increase the brightness (step S1705). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether the operation is an operation of the upper button 137a or the right button 137d.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the current operation is an operation to increase the luminance (step S1705: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether the luminance being set is the maximum value (step S1707). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the luminance being set is 10 when the luminance can be set to 10 levels of 1 to 10. When the CPU 404 determines that the set luminance is the maximum value (step S1707: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1715. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the set brightness is not the maximum value (step S1707: No), the CPU 404 increases the brightness by one level (step S1709), and then executes the process of step S1715.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S1705 that the current operation is not an operation for increasing the luminance, that is, if it is determined that the operation is a luminance lowering operation (for example, operation of the down button 137b or the left button 137c) ( Step S1705: No), it is determined whether or not the luminance being set is the minimum value (step S1711). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the luminance being set is 1 when the luminance can be set to 10 levels of 1 to 10. When the CPU 404 determines that the set luminance is the minimum value (step S1711), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1715. On the other hand, when it is determined that the luminance being set is not the minimum value (step S1711: No), the luminance is lowered by one level (step S1713), and then the process of step S1715 is executed.

  In step S1715, the CPU 404 performs a resetting process for updating the brightness setting display changed as described above (step S1715), and then ends this process. Here, when the value of the brightness volume knob is 0, the brightness setting screen is kept in a non-display state. Even when the value of the brightness volume knob is 0, the brightness setting screen may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the brightness setting change and the set brightness can be displayed on the decorative design display device 208 in this way.

  Returning to FIG. 28A, when the CPU 404 executes the user brightness setting operation process as described above, after setting the timer until the brightness setting screen is deleted (step S1603), the CPU 404 performs the brightness setting display update process. finish. Here, the timer setting until the brightness setting screen is cleared is a process of resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and transmitting a liquid crystal command for resetting the count of the predetermined display time. Including.

  Next, the volume setting display update process executed in the right button operation setting display process and the left button operation setting display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29A is a flowchart of the volume setting display update process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 executes a user volume setting operation process (step S1801). Here, details of the user volume setting operation processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28B is a flowchart of user volume setting operation processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 acquires the value of the volume control knob (step S1901). Specifically, for example, based on a signal output from a volume control (not shown) provided on the first sub-board 160, the value indicated by the volume control is obtained. The volume control knob is a knob for changing the volume by a game clerk, for example. That is, the volume control knob can be called a volume control for setting the master volume. It should be noted that the volume volume knob may not be provided, and in this case, the processing as in step S1901 may not be executed.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the value of the volume control is 0 (step S1903). If the CPU 404 determines that the value of the volume control is 0 (step S1903: Yes), it executes the process of step S1919. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the value of the volume control is not 0 (step S1903: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the current operation is an operation for increasing the volume (step S1905). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether the operation is the right button 137d or the upper button 137a.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the current operation is an operation to increase the volume (step S1905: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume being set is the maximum value (step S1907). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume being set is 10 when the volume can be set to 10 levels of 1 to 10. If the CPU 404 determines that the volume being set is the maximum value (step S1907: YES), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1919. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the volume being set is not the maximum value (step S1907: No), the CPU 404 raises the volume by one level (step S1909), and outputs data for outputting a sound effect for increasing the volume. After setting (step S1911), the process of step S1919 is executed. As a result, every time an operation for increasing the volume is performed, a sound effect indicating that the volume has been increased is output from the speaker 120.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S1905 that the current operation is not an operation for increasing the volume, that is, if the CPU 404 determines that the operation is to decrease the volume (for example, an operation of the left button 137c or the lower button 137b) ( Step S1905: No), it is determined whether or not the volume being set is the minimum value (Step S1913). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume being set is 1 when the volume can be set to 10 levels of 1 to 10. When the CPU 404 determines that the volume being set is the minimum value (step S1913), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1919. On the other hand, if it is determined that the volume being set is not the minimum value (step S1913: No), the volume is lowered by one level (step S1915), and data for outputting a sound effect for lowering the volume is set. (Step S1917), the process of step S1919 is executed.

  In step S1919, the CPU 404 performs a resetting process for updating the volume setting display changed as described above (step S1919), and then ends this process. Here, when the value of the volume control is 0, the volume setting screen is kept in a non-display state. Even when the value of the volume knob is 0, the volume setting screen may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the volume setting change and the set volume can be displayed on the decorative design display device 208 in this way.

  Returning to FIG. 29A, when the CPU 404 executes the user volume setting operation process as described above, after setting the timer until the volume setting screen is deleted (step S1603), the CPU 404 performs the volume setting display update process. finish. Here, the setting of the timer until the volume setting screen is cleared is a process of resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and transmitting a liquid crystal command for resetting the count of the predetermined display time. Including. The time until the volume setting screen is cleared (timer) and the time until the brightness setting screen is cleared (timer) are the same time, but one time is configured to be longer than the other time. It may be.

  Next, an upper button operation setting display process executed in various button operation related processes will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the up button operation setting display process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the lower button operation setting display process executed in the various button operation related processes is the same as the upper button operation setting display process, so the description of the upper button 137a is replaced with the description of the lower button 137b. As a matter of course, the description is omitted.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not a power-on related process is being executed (step S2001). If the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is being executed (step S2001: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when determining that the power-on related processing is not being executed (step S2001: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether the setting display is not displayed (step S2003). When it is determined that the setting display is not displayed (step S2003: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the setting display is in a non-demo state (step S2005). If the CPU 404 determines that it is in the non-demo state (step S2005: Yes), it ends this process.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that it is not in the non-demonstration state (step S2005: No), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen (step S2007), and then ends this process.

  If it is determined in step S2003 that the setting display is not hidden (step S2003: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not a volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S2009). If the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S2009: Yes), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen (step S2011), and then ends this process. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is not displayed (step S2009: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S2013). If the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S2013: Yes), it executes the brightness setting screen update process shown in FIG. 28A (step S2015), and then ends this process. .

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is not displayed (step S2013: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume setting screen is displayed (step S2017). If the CPU 404 determines that the volume setting screen is displayed (step S2017: Yes), it executes the volume setting screen update process shown in FIG. 29A (step S2019), and then ends this process. . In the present embodiment, when the up button 137a (down button 137b) is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume setting is performed, but the up button 137a (down button 137b). Then, the volume may not be set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume setting screen is not displayed (step S2017: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the symbol variation setting screen is displayed (step S2021). When the CPU 404 determines that the symbol variation setting screen is displayed (step S2021: Yes), the CPU 404 resets the timer until the symbol variation setting screen is deleted (step S2023), and then performs this process. Exit. The symbol variation setting screen is deleted when a predetermined display time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without operating each direction button of the operation key unit 137, but the processing in step S2023 is executed. The display time of the symbol change setting screen is reset.

  Next, the button long press process will be described. FIG. 31A is a flowchart of the button long press process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This button long press process is a process executed in the chance button control process (step S411) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG.

  The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 first initializes the operation state of the operation means (step S2101). Subsequently, the CPU 404 clears the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S2103).

  Thereafter, the CPU 404 executes a chance button long press operation state determination process (step S2105).

  Here, the chance button long press operation state determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 as the chance button is being pressed and held (step S2201). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 is operated for a long time by detecting that the input state of the signal of the effect button 136 at the input port is continuously ON.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 has been pressed for a long time (step S2201: Yes), the operation status of the effect button 136 in the RAM 408 is updated to a long press state (step S2203). On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect button 136 has been pressed for a long time (step S2201: No), this process ends.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the time until the liquid crystal command is transmitted has passed (step S2205). Specifically, the CPU 404 is set in the time T1 and T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting set in the continuous hitting operation processing shown in FIG. 23 or in the long press operation processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not time T3 and T4 have elapsed until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the time until the liquid crystal command is transmitted has elapsed (step S2205: Yes), the CPU 404 turns on the command transmission flag in the RAM 408 (step S2207), and ends this processing. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the time until the liquid crystal command is transmitted has elapsed (step S2205: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S2207.

  Referring back to FIG. 31A, after executing the chance button long press operation state determination process, the CPU 404 performs a determination button long press operation state determination process (step S2107) and a left button long press operation state determination process (step S2109). , Right button long press operation state determination processing (step S2111), up button long press operation state determination processing (step S2113), and down button long press operation state determination processing (step S2115) are sequentially executed. Note that each of the determination button long press operation state determination process, left button long press operation state determination process, right button long press operation state determination process, up button long press operation state determination process, and down button long press operation state determination process Since the contents are the same as the above-described chance button long press operation state determination process, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After that, the CPU 404 executes various button long press operation related processing (step S2117), and then ends this processing.

  Next, various button long press operation related processes executed in the button long press process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of various button long press operation related processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the command transmission flag in the RAM 408 is ON (step S2301). If the command transmission flag is not ON (step S2301: No), the CPU 404 terminates this process, but if the command transmission flag is ON (step S2301: Yes), the effect button (chance button) 136 is used alone. In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the operation is performed. If the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is being operated alone (step S2302: Yes), it executes the button pressing process shown in FIG. 20 (step S2305), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect button 136 is operated alone (step S2303: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the determination button 137e is operated alone (step S2307). If the CPU 404 determines that the determination button 137e is operated alone (step S2307: Yes), it executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2309), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the determination button 137e is operated alone (step S2307: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the right button 137d is operated alone (step S2311). If the CPU 404 determines that the right button 137d is operated alone (step S2311: Yes), it executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2313), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the right button 137d is operated alone (step S2311: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the left button 137c is operated alone (step S2315). If the CPU 404 determines that the left button 137c is operated alone (step S2315: Yes), it executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2317), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the left button 137c is operated alone (step S2315: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S2319). If the CPU 404 determines that the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S2319: Yes), it executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2321), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S2319: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the lower button 137b is operated alone (step S2323). If the CPU 404 determines that the down button 137b is being operated alone (step S2323: Yes), it executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2325), and then ends this process. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the down button 137b is operated alone (step S2323: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S2325.

  In the present embodiment, for example, when the operation of the effect button 136 is requested during the display of the effect for one operation, the effect for continuous hitting, the effect of long press, and various setting screens. In addition to the above, when the button other than the button for which the operation is requested is further operated, such as the right button 137d being operated at the same time, any operation is handled to be invalid. For example, when the operation of the effect button 136 is requested, when the right button 137d is further operated simultaneously with the effect button 136, the effect button 136 is displayed. You may make it handle as having been operated.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  FIG. 34 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and an ordinary drawing. A hold lamp 216 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34A, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or stopping the symbol). From the top, the normal symbol changing notification region, and the special symbol changing notification region of Special Figure 1 from above. , It becomes a notification area during the symbol variation of Special Figure 2. While a regular symbol is stopped, a square figure is lit and displayed. When a regular symbol is changed, the square figure is blinked or extinguished. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the circular figure is lit and displayed. However, when the symbol of special figure 1 is changing, the circular figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit up and displayed. However, while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 34 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  The hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. . The number of holdings in the special figure 1 is represented not only by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 but also by the number of the holding icons in the special figure 1, and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is the number of lighting of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220. In addition to this, it is also represented by the number of reserved icons in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon, and the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 displays the hold icons vertically. The lower the hold icon, the older the win icon becomes.

  In FIG. 34 (a), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. The default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed. That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 34A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 34 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because. Note that the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. Is indicated by a dotted line for easy understanding. Note that a line demarcating the area may be provided, or a line demarcating the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the hold icon display area of the special figure that is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is located on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the other special figure hold icon display area is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 34A, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed. A region 282 is displayed at the right end. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 is a square, non-patterned and white display form, and the display position is different from the hold icon in the special figure 1 as well as the display position ( Here, the shape) is also different, so that the player can make a determination at first glance. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → starting blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → starting or deleting the moving animation of the hold icon → decorating decorative symbol variation. However, this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 34 (b), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. There has been no change in the design.

  In FIG. 34 (c), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 in the special figure 1 is started. In this moving animation, the hold icon (target hold icon for the current symbol variation) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the decorative symbol variation display has not started.

  In FIG. 34 (d), the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 34 (e), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change has reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The decorative symbol display has not been started. It should be noted that when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the pending icon that has been the first pending icon h11 so far may be viewed as the varying icon h0, or until then the second pending icon The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, in FIG. 34 (f), the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (g), an operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the effective period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 where the decorative symbol variation display has started. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variation display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Thus, it can be said that the operation promotion notification image 136P is an example of an operation display related to the operation means.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 34 (h), the valid period is reduced. In FIG. 34 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period, a reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P, as shown in FIG. . In the reach state entry preview image 2071, a character display “chance is” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. It should be noted that even when the effect button 136 is not pressed within the effective period, the display as shown in FIG. 34 (j) may be performed, or the display as shown in FIG. May be displayed differently, or may not be displayed as shown in FIG. 34 (j). This also applies to the effect for one-time operation, the effect for continuous hitting, and the effect for long press. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 functions as a second operation result display. Further, in this effect example, the effect in which the operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed may be referred to as an example of the second effect. In the following description, “operation result display” may be referred to as “operation response display”.

  In FIG. 34 (k), the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 disappears, and the decorative symbol change display becomes visible, and thereafter, the vehicle enters the reach state as shown in FIG. It should be noted that even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the entry may always be made.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 34 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c so far, has been moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size, as shown in FIG. , Has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (o) shows a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The scene animation is displayed.

  Note that the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is not limited to the advance notice of entering the reach state, but may be a advance notice of progress to super reach.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 35 (p) that continues from FIG. 34 (o), the duel scene animation continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 35 (s). In FIG. 35 (s), the main character, Tono, wins the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 35 (t), everything is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. In addition, it may replace with non-display and may display a different background image. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 9 (u), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed. The background here may be non-displayed or a different background image. Further, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (v), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” determined to be the 15R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the 4th design (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG.35 (v) is lighted. In FIG. 35 (v), the background is not displayed, but actually, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 35 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of “probable big hit” is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  On the other hand, when the reach state is reached with different decorative symbols (substantially 5R probability big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit) in FIG. 34 (l), the figure in another case continues from FIG. 35 (t). In 35 (u ′), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6—decoration 6—decoration 6” is displayed. In FIG. 35 (v ′) following FIG. 35 (u ′), “decoration 6—decoration”. The combination of jackpot decorative symbols of “6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 35 (w ′) following FIG. 35 (v ′), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of “big hit” is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of the effect in another case following FIG. 35 (q) step by step.

  In FIG. 36 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 34 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 36 (b). In FIG. 36 (b), the main character, Tono-sama loses to the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 36 (c), like the case of FIG. 35 (t), all but the fourth symbol display area 284 is temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 36 (d), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is started. Here, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (e), the fourth symbol (circular shape) of the special symbol 1 is turned on, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period shown in FIG. 1, in the variation icon display area 280, an erase animation of the variation icon h0 is executed. In FIG. 8F, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started. The erasing animation continues in FIG. 10G, and the variation icon h0 is completely disappeared in FIG. Note that the animation for deleting the change icon h0 may be executed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

  Next, an example of the operation result for each gaming state generated by the operation of each button of the effect button and the operation key unit 137 in this embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 37 (a) is a diagram for explaining an example of the operation result of each button in the standby state (customer waiting state) in which the symbol variation display is not performed, and FIG. 37 (b) is during the symbol variation display. It is a figure explaining an example of the operation result of each button in, and the figure (c) is a figure explaining an example of the operation result of each button in a big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), in the standby state, when the production button 136 (chance button) is operated during the customer waiting demonstration display (animation demonstration display) by animation, the animation demonstration display is stopped and the symbol demonstration is performed. Move to display. The symbol demo display is a display showing a variation display result of the last displayed decoration symbol. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated while the symbol demonstration is being displayed and the setting screen is not displayed, a demonstration effect corresponding to the operation is displayed. Here, for example, when the demonstration effect is capable of executing a plurality of types of effect modes, a game that changes the effect mode, makes a character appear, displays an effect, or explains a game method An effect display for starting explanation or the like. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated while the symbol demonstration is being displayed and the setting screen is being displayed, the volume or brightness after the setting is confirmed and the setting screen is deleted.

  Further, when the determination button 137e is operated while the setting screen is not displayed in the standby state, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, if the enter button 137e is operated while the setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the display time of the currently displayed setting screen (volume setting screen or brightness setting screen) is reset to extend the display.

  If the right button 137d is operated while the setting screen is not displayed in the standby state, the volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, when the right button 137d is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the volume is changed and the volume is increased. In the standby state, when the right button 137d is operated while the luminance setting screen is displayed, the luminance is changed and the luminance is increased and becomes brighter.

  If the left button 137c is operated while the setting screen is not displayed in the standby state, the volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the left button 137c is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered. In the standby state, when the left button 137c is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is lowered and darkened.

  Further, when the upper button 137a is operated while the setting screen is not displayed in the standby state, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the upper button 137a is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the brightness is changed and the brightness is increased. In the standby state, when the upper button 137a is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is increased.

  Further, when the down button 137b is operated in the standby state and the setting screen is not displayed, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the lower button 137b is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the brightness is changed and the brightness is lowered. In the standby state, when the down button 137b is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (b), when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation effective period during which the symbol variation is being displayed and the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted, an effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Specifically, an effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for the one-time operation, an effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for continuous hitting, and the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for long press The production according to the is performed. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated during the symbol variation display and outside the operation effective period of the effect button 136, no operation result is given. In this embodiment, when each button of the operation key unit 137 is simultaneously operated in addition to the effect button 136 within the operation effective period, even if the effect button 136 is operated, any operation result is obtained. It is configured not to be made. Further, even outside the operation valid period, various lamps 418 may be blinked, an effect display may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or a sound effect may be output in accordance with the operation of the effect button 136. . At this time, an effect unrelated to the effect in the symbol variation display may be used.

  In addition, if the determination button 137e is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not being displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, if the change button 137e is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is being displayed, the volume after setting is fixed and the setting screen being displayed is hidden.

  When the right button 137d is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not being displayed, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the right button 137d is operated while the symbol variation display is being performed and the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is increased.

  If the left button 137c is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not displayed, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the left button 137c is operated while the symbol variation display is being performed and the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered.

  In addition, if the up button 137a is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not being displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, if the up button 137a is operated while the symbol variation display is being performed and the symbol variation setting screen is being displayed, the display time of the symbol variation setting screen being displayed is reset to extend the display.

  Further, when the down button 137b is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not being displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, if the lower button 137b is operated while the symbol variation display is being performed and the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the display time of the symbol variation setting screen being displayed is reset and the display is extended.

  In addition, when the effect button 136 and the direction key are operated within the operation valid period for accepting the operation while the symbol variation is being displayed, an effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Specifically, when both the effect button 136 and the direction key are pressed at the same time during the execution of the effect for a single operation that requires the operation of the effect button 136 and the direction key, the effect corresponding to this, etc. Is done. Further, if both the effect button 136 and the direction key are operated outside the operation valid period while the symbol variation is being displayed, no operation result is obtained. Even when the operation is not valid, various lamps 418 blink, effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and sound effects are output in accordance with the operation of both the effect button 136 and the direction key. You may do it. At this time, an effect unrelated to the effect in the symbol variation display may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (c), when the effect button 136 is operated during the jackpot game and the operation button 136 is operated within the operation valid period for receiving the operation of the effect button 136, an effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Specifically, an effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for the one-time operation, an effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for continuous hitting, and the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for long press The production according to the is performed. In addition, if the effect button 136 is operated during the big hit game and the operation button 136 is not operated, no operation result is obtained. In this embodiment, when each button of the operation key unit 137 is simultaneously operated in addition to the effect button 136 within the operation effective period, even if the effect button 136 is operated, any operation result is obtained. It is configured not to be made. Further, even outside the operation valid period, various lamps 418 may be blinked, an effect display may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or a sound effect may be output in accordance with the operation of the effect button 136. . At this time, an effect unrelated to the effect in the symbol variation display may be used.

  In addition, if the determination button 137e is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, no operation result is given. On the other hand, if the determination button 137e is operated during the jackpot game and the setting screen (volume setting screen or luminance setting screen) is displayed, the volume or luminance after setting is confirmed, and the setting screen being displayed is displayed. You want to hide.

  Further, when the right button 137d is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, a volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the right button 137d is operated during the big hit game and the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is increased. When the right button 137d is operated during the big hit game and the luminance setting screen is displayed, the luminance is changed and the luminance is increased and becomes brighter.

  If the left button 137c is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, a volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the left button 137c is operated during the big hit game and the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered. If the left button 137c is operated during the big hit game and the luminance setting screen is displayed, the luminance is changed and the luminance is lowered and darkened.

  Further, when the up button 137a is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the upper button 137a is operated during the big hit game and the luminance setting screen is displayed, the luminance is changed and the luminance is increased. Note that if the up button 137a is operated during the big hit game and the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is increased.

  Further, when the down button 137b is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the down button 137b is operated during the big hit game and the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is lowered. If the down button 137b is operated during the big hit game and the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered.

  In addition, if the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated during a big hit game other than the big hit round (for example, during the pre-hit start effect, during the round effect, during the big end effect, etc.) Not done. Further, when the big hit game is in progress and both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated during the big hit round, the BGM song output during the big hit game is changed. In this embodiment, a plurality of songs are prepared as BGM output during the big hit game. For example, every time the production button 136 + left button 137c is operated, "Song 1"-"Song 3"-"Song" The selected song can be shifted in the reverse direction, such as “2”-“Song 1”.

  In addition, if the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated during the big hit game and other than the big hit round, no operation result is made. In addition, when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated during the big hit game and during the big hit round, the BGM music output during the big hit game is changed. More specifically, every time the production button 136 + the right button 137d is operated, “Song 1” − “Song 2” − “Song 3” − “Song 1”... Is selected in the forward direction. You can transition songs.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 38 is an effect example that may be executed in some of the effects performed from FIGS. 34 to 36.

  FIG. 38 (1) corresponds to FIG. 34 (o), and displays an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. As shown in FIG. 38 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is changed and displayed, and the setting screen is not displayed. In the present embodiment, a state in which the reach is performed by “decoration 7” is shown, and three decorative symbols are also displayed in the lower left of the display screen. These three decorative symbols, for example, are stopped and displayed at the same time in combination of symbols corresponding to the display results of Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2 at the timing when the special symbols are stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, three decorative symbols displayed in the lower left part of the display screen are stopped and displayed at the same time. However, for example, they may be stopped and displayed in order of left, right, and middle. .

  At this time, when the right button 137d is operated as shown in FIG. 38 (2), a symbol variation setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 38 (3). At this time, the right button 137d emits light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, red) while being operated. The other buttons may be turned off or may emit light in other light emission modes (for example, blue color). Similarly, when the left button 137c is operated, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed. The symbol variation mid-use setting screen is a display screen including a volume gauge VG. That is, the symbol variation setting screen functions as an example of a volume setting display. This setting screen for changing symbols is arranged and displayed in a layer in front of the layer on which the effect display is performed. Therefore, while the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the effect display is in a state that is difficult to visually recognize. Note that the volume gauge VG indicates that the volume is the third of the five levels.

  If the right button 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 38 (4) while the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the volume increases by one step as shown in FIG. 38 (5). Accordingly, the volume gauge VG changes to a display indicating that the volume is in the fourth level. In the present embodiment, the volume is increased by one step each time the right button 137d is operated. On the other hand, when the left button 137c is operated in a state where the volume gauge VG indicates the third level, the volume decreases by one level, and accordingly, the volume gauge VG is the second level. It will change to the display which shows. In the present embodiment, only the sound volume can be set during symbol variation. However, brightness setting, effect mode, BGM, and the like may be set. In addition, when the right button 137d (left button 137c) is pressed for a long time, the auto repeat function is activated during the long pressing time, and the volume increases by one step every predetermined time (for example, 200 ms). The volume may be configured (to decrease), or the volume may not be increased (not decreased) as long as the operation is not performed once so that the auto repeat function is not activated.

  FIG. 38 (6) corresponds to FIG. 35 (p), and the animation of the duel scene continues. In this effect example, the effect (first effect) of the simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is then started at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (7). Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (8), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image that prompts both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d to be operated simultaneously within the effective period. The The operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 that is an image imitating the effect button 136, a right button image 137dP1 that is an image imitating the right button 137d, and a remaining time display bar that represents the remaining time of the effective period. 136P2 is included. At this time, an effect waiting animation display is performed on the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1. Here, the operation waiting animation is, for example, an animation in which a button is retracted or protruded repeatedly. Here, a still image may be displayed without performing the operation waiting animation display. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (8), before the operation valid period starts, even if the effect button 136 or the right button 137d is operated, it is treated as invalid. Note that the operation promotion notification image may be displayed at the same time as the operation effective period starts. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display including the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 may be referred to as an example of the first operation display regarding the operations of both the first operation means and the second operation means. .

  Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (10), as shown in FIG. 38 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When both are operated simultaneously, as shown in FIG. 38 (12), the effect movable body 225 located above the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display screen may be hidden. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, effect display (first operation result display) is performed as if the effect movable body 225 is shining. That is, an operation result effect is performed. The effect button 136 and the right button 137d emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, red) while being operated. Thereby, it is notified in advance that the result of the symbol variation display is a big hit. In addition, it may be performed even when the result of the symbol variation display is not a big hit, so that a high degree of expectation for the big hit may be produced. Here, the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is not limited to the case where the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same timing, and the right button 137d is operated while the effect button 136 is pressed. It goes without saying that the case where the effect button 136 is operated in a state where the right button 137d is pressed is also included. That is, it is only necessary that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are pressed. Only when the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same timing, the simultaneous operation effect as shown in FIG. 38 (12) may be started. Further, when one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is pressed and the other is not operated within a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second), it may not be handled as a simultaneous operation.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 225 provides an effect by simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. However, the effect movable body 225 also performs the operation even when the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation effective period. It is comprised so that an effect may be performed. Note that when the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation effective period, the effect by the effect movable body 225 may not be performed. In addition, the content of the effect to be executed may be different between the case where the simultaneous operation is performed within the operation effective period and the case where the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation effective period. If the simultaneous operation is performed at the same time, an effect with a high expectation to the big hit is performed, and if the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation effective period, an effect with a low expectation to the big hit is performed. You may make it like that and vice versa.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is suggested that the greater the number of buttons that require an operation, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot in the symbol variation display. Thereby, as the number of buttons increases, the player has a higher expectation for the big hit, and the interest of the game may be improved. That is, it can be said that the display shown in FIG. 38 (8) or the like functions as the change notice. Note that the degree of expectation for jackpots in the symbol variation display may be the same regardless of the number of buttons that require an operation. Further, it may be performed as a pre-reading notice.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38 (13), the animation of the duel scene is resumed. In FIG. 38 (14), the main character Tono wins the enemy swordsman, and then, as shown in FIG. 38 (15), At the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner. In the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, three decorative symbols are still displayed in a variable manner.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating another effect example in the effect shown in FIG. Here, FIGS. 39 (a1) to 39 (a5) show a case where only one button is operated when an effect requesting the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is performed. 39 (b1) to FIG. 39 (b5) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 39 (a1) to FIG. 39 (a5), and FIG. 39 (c1). ) To (c5) show that when an effect requesting the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is being performed, one of the buttons is operated first and the state is maintained while the other is maintained. An example of the effect when the button is operated is shown.

  FIG. 39 (a1) corresponds to FIG. 38 (10). At this time, as shown in FIG. 39 (a2), when the effect button 136 is not operated and only the right button 137d is operated, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is non-displayed as shown in FIG. 39 (a3). Although the display mode at the time of operation changes to the display mode at the time of operation, the operation of the effect movable body 225 (operation result effect) is not performed. If the right button 137d is operated while the symbol variation display is being performed, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed and the volume can be set. From the start of the display for prompting (button operation promotion display) to the end of the symbol variation display, the display of the symbol variation setting screen is prohibited and the volume setting is not performed. That is, the sound volume setting is prohibited from the timing of FIG. 38 (7) until the symbol variation display ends. Note that the volume setting may be prohibited only while the button operation promotion display is being performed. The volume setting may be prohibited only during the period from the start of the button operation promotion display to the end of the operation result effect.

  After that, when the operation of the right button 137d is canceled as shown in FIG. 39 (a4), the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is changed from the display mode during operation to the non-operation display as shown in FIG. 39 (a5). It changes into a mode and an operation result effect is not performed yet.

  FIG. 39 (b1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 38 (10), but the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1, respectively. At this time, as shown in FIG. 39 (b2), when the effect button 136 is not operated and only the right button 137d is operated, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is not displayed as shown in FIG. 39 (b3). Although the display mode at the time of operation changes to the display mode at the time of operation, the operation result effect is not performed. In addition, since both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are not operated at the same time, the operation effective period continues, and not only the remaining time display bar 136P2a corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 but also the right button image 137dP1. The corresponding remaining time display bar 136P2b is also displayed in such a manner that the meter continues to decrease despite the right button 137d being operated.

  Thereafter, when the operation of the right button 137d is canceled as shown in FIG. 39 (b4), the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is changed from the display mode at the time of operation to the non-operational display mode as shown in FIG. 39 (b5). It changes into a mode and an operation result effect is not performed yet.

  FIG. 39 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 38 (10). At this time, as shown in FIG. 39 (c2), when the effect button 136 is not operated and only the right button 137d is operated, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is non-displayed as shown in FIG. 39 (c3). Although the display mode at the time of operation changes to the display mode at the time of operation, the operation of the effect movable body 225 (operation result effect) is not performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 39 (c4), when the effect button 136 is operated with the right button 137d being operated, the operation result effect is started as shown in FIG. 39 (c5). The same applies to the case where only the effect button 136 is operated first and the right button 137d is operated in that state. That is, when one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated or pressed for a long time and the other button is operated, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same timing. A result similar to the case (execution of the operation result effect) is obtained.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating another effect example in the effect shown in FIG. Here, FIGS. 40 (a1) to 40 (a2) show a case where only one button is operated when an effect requesting the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is performed. 40 (b1) to FIG. 40 (b2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 38 (7) to (8), and FIG. 40 (c1). ) To (c2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 38 (7) to (8).

  FIG. 40 (a1) shows a state where only the right button 137d is pressed for a long time without operating the effect button 136. Therefore, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is changed from the display mode at the time of non-operation to the display mode at the time of operation. Thereafter, for example, when the remaining 1/3 of the effective period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 40 (a2), it is as if the effect button image 136P1 vibrates with the character display “please also press the chance button”. Animation display (vibration animation display) is started, and a display further prompting the operation of the button that has not been operated is performed. The start timing of the vibration animation display is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, a predetermined time (for example, one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated) The vibration animation display may be started when 3 seconds) elapses. The vibration animation display ends when the corresponding button (the effect button 136 in FIG. 40A2) is operated. As described above, when only one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated and a predetermined time has elapsed, a display (vibration animation display) different from the normal display (operation waiting animation display). ) May be performed.

  40 (b1) to FIG. 40 (b2) correspond to FIG. 38 (7) to FIG. 38 (8), but in FIG. 40 (b2), the right button image 137dP1 is not displayed, and only the effect button image 136P1 is displayed. Is displayed.

  40 (c1) to 40 (c2) also correspond to FIGS. 38 (7) to (8). In FIG. 40 (c2), in addition to the right button image 137dP1 and the effect button image 136P1. A left button image 137cP1 is further displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for the big hit is changed by changing the number of displayed button images. For example, as the number of displayed button images increases, It is configured to have high expectations.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining another example of the effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 41 (a) corresponds to FIG. 38 (7), and the effect of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image that prompts both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d to be operated simultaneously within the effective period. The In FIG. 41 (b), as the operation promotion notification image, the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b representing the remaining time of the operation effective period are displayed corresponding to each button image together with the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1. Has been. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (b), before the operation valid period starts, even if the effect button 136 or the right button 137d is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, after the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (c), at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (d), as shown in FIG. 41 (e), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When only the right button 137d is operated, as shown in FIG. 41 (f), the remaining time display bar 136P2b displayed corresponding to the right button image 137dP1 and the right button image 137dP1 changes to gray-out display. The meter of the remaining time display bar 136P2b displays that the remaining time is zero. The right button image 137dP1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2b may be deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (g), the effect movable body 225 moves to a position that covers the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a turning operation that vibrates on the spot is performed, and an operation result effect may be performed. It suggests that you can't. Note that the turning operation by the effect movable body 225 may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (h), when the operation of the right button 137d is canceled and the effect button 136 is operated, the effect movable body 225 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device as shown in FIG. 41 (i). In some cases, the display moves to a position covering the entire 208 display screen. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the above-described effect display.

  As described above, the operation result effect may be performed by performing the button operation once in the order of the right button 137d and the effect button 136 in the operation effective period. It should be noted that in this effect example, the operation result effect may be performed by operating two buttons once for the effect button 136 and the right button 137d regardless of the operation order, or in the correct order ( For example, the operation result effect may be performed on condition that the button operation is performed in the order of the right button 137d and the effect button 136).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (h), when the effect button 136 is operated, but the operation result effect is not performed, the effect movable body 225 descends as shown in FIG. 41 (i ′). Ascending without being performed, an effect that failed to produce a single button operation is performed. At this time, the remaining time display bar 136P2a displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the effect button image 136P1 changes to gray-out display, and the meter of the remaining time display bar 136P2a displays that the remaining time is zero. Become. As a result, it is notified that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d have been operated. The effect button image 136P1, the right button image 137dP1, and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b may be deleted.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 41 (j ′), the animation of the duel scene is resumed, and the state in which the main character Tono-sama lost to the enemy swordsman is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when requesting the operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed, and the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are displayed. Although the display prompting the operation of the button requesting the operation is performed so as to prompt the operation, for example, the display prompting the operation of the button other than the button requesting the operation may be performed. Specifically, for example, when a single operation of the effect button 136 is requested, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed. However, if only the effect button 136 is operated, the operation result effect is performed. May be performed. Further, a display that prompts the user to operate a button different from the button that requests the operation may be performed. Specifically, for example, when the operation of the right button 137d is requested, only the effect button image 136P1 is displayed, but the operation result effect is not performed even if the effect button image 136P1 is operated, and the right button 137d is operated. In such a case, an operation result effect may be performed.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (8), the operation promotion notification image is displayed, but the operation effective period is not started, and then the operation promotion notification image is deleted, so-called fake effects are produced. You may make it perform. As the effect of fake, for example, in the effect that the operation promotion notification image is displayed when the two effect button images 136P1 are close to each other and overlap, the two effect button images 136P1 are not overlapped. An effect that the button operation effect is not started and an operation promotion notification image is displayed, but the target button that is urging the operation becomes difficult to press mechanically or is displaced to an inoperable position. There may be an effect that makes it impossible to press the button.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining an example of the setting operation using the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

  42 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and a normal drawing. A hold lamp 216 is shown. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a special symbol 1 4th symbol LED 285a and a special symbol 2 4th symbol LED 285b are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 200. The 4th symbol LED 285a for the special figure 1 notifies whether or not the special figure 1 is changing the symbol by its lighting mode, and the 4th symbol LED 285b for the special symbol 2 indicates the special symbol 2 by the lighting mode. Informs whether or not the symbol is changing. For example, the 4th design LED 285a for the special figure 1 and the 4th design LED 285b for the special figure 2 blinks at a predetermined interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) during the design variation display, and the display result is lost. It is configured to turn off and turn on when the display result is a big hit, but the lighting mode can be set arbitrarily, so that the emission color varies according to the symbol variation display state It may be.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42A, a jackpot start effect indicating that the jackpot game has been started is displayed. In addition, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of how to hit right is displayed. In addition, the 4th design LED 285a for special figure 1 is turned off, indicating that the display result is lost, and the 4th design LED 285b for special figure 2 is turned on, indicating that the display result is a big hit. Has been. That is, the big hit this time is a big hit by displaying the special figure a on the second special figure display device 214.

  FIG. 42B shows a state in which the first round is started. As shown in FIG. 42 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect during the big hit round. Then, “1R” indicating that it is the first round is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first big hit game is shown below the hitting display. “BONUS × 1” is displayed. In the present embodiment, a music name display MT indicating the music name of the BGM output from the speaker 120 is displayed at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 42C shows a state in which the third round is executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 42 (d), when the right button 137d (or the left button 137c) is operated once, as shown in FIG. 42 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 sets the volume. A screen is displayed. Note that the volume gauge VG on the volume setting screen indicates that the volume is the third of the five levels. Note that the volume setting screen may be displayed or deleted when the left button 137c and the right button 137d are operated at the same time. By doing so, the player intends to operate the volume setting screen. By doing so, it may be possible to set the volume, and it may be possible to suppress the annoyance that the volume setting screen is displayed by an unintended operation.

  Then, when the right button 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 42 (f) while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume increases by one step as shown in FIG. 42 (g), In response to this, the volume gauge VG changes to a display indicating that the volume is at the fourth level.

  Further, when the right button 137d is operated while the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 42 (h) while the volume setting screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 42 (i). The volume is not increased or decreased, the BGM song is changed, and the changed song name is displayed in the song name display MT. In other words, the present embodiment is configured so that the volume cannot be changed while the effect button 136 is being operated. Note that the volume setting screen is deleted after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after any one of the direction buttons in the operation key unit 137 is last operated. Here, when the direction button 136 and any one of the direction buttons in the operation key unit 137 are operated at the same time, the direction button may not be operated. Further, when the effect button 136 and the direction button are operated at the same time, the volume setting screen may be deleted.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram for describing an effect example using the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a variable display of decorative symbols. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display region 280 at the lower center of the effect display region 208d, and a hold icon display region 281 of Special Figure 1 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display region 280. .

  In the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, a hold icon representing the hold in FIG. 1 is displayed. The number of holdings in FIG. 1 is represented not only by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 but also by the number of holding icons in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon.

  In FIG. 43 (a), one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 has a default display mode (round shape). In a white and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In addition to the default display mode, the hold icon can also be displayed in the display mode of a pre-reading notice, and can also function as a pre-reading notice for a pending symbol variation display.

  In the variation icon display area 280, the variation icon h0 is displayed in a default display mode. In addition to the default display mode, the change icon h0 can be displayed in a preview display mode, and can function as a preview display for the symbol change display.

  When the right button 137d is operated once as shown in FIG. 43 (b) during the variation display of the decorative symbols shown in FIG. 43 (a), the volume setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 43 (c). Is displayed. At this time, according to the volume gauge VG, it is indicated that the volume is the fourth of the five levels. In this embodiment, it is configured so that no operation result is obtained even when a button to which an effect or function according to the operation is not assigned is operated. For example, the button is operated. You may make it perform the effect production to the effect of confirming. The effect effect may be an effect by sound output from the speaker 120 or light emission of the lamps by the various lamps 418 in addition to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the operation effective period. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. However, since the timing shown in FIG. 43 (d) is before the start of the operation valid period, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid. On the other hand, the volume setting is valid, and the volume can be changed by operating the left button 137c or the right button 137d. Further, since the remaining time display bar 136P2 is arranged and displayed on the layer on the back side of the volume gauge VG, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed so as to overlap the volume gauge VG and is difficult to visually recognize. In addition, although the decorative symbol variation display is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, the player can display the special symbol by a variation symbol displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Can be recognized as fluctuating. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

  Then, after the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (e), as shown in FIG. 43 (f), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously, As shown in 43 (g), neither the operation result effect performed by operating the effect button 136 nor the volume change. That is, the operations of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are treated as invalid. Note that the meter of the remaining time display bar 136P2 hidden in the volume gauge VG is displayed in a reduced manner with the passage of time.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the last time the direction key was operated, the volume setting screen is erased and the remaining time display bar 136P2 appears as shown in FIG. 43 (h). In this case as well, unless the operation of the right button 137d is stopped, it is not treated as valid even if the effect button 136 is operated.

  Next, the relationship between the operation of the effect button 136 and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 45. Here, FIG. 44 (A) is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 and the effect display during the execution of the effect for repeated hits, and FIG. 44 (B) is the effect for repeated hits. FIG. 6C is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the long press operation by the effect button 136 and the effect display during the execution of the effect, and FIG. 10C shows the long press operation by the effect button 136 during the execution of the effect for long press. It is a timing chart explaining the relationship between a production | presentation display. FIG. 45 (A) is a timing chart for explaining the effect display when the long press operation by the effect button 136 is intermittently performed during the execution of the effect for continuous hitting. It is a timing chart explaining the effect display when the long press operation by the effect button 136 is intermittently performed during the execution of the effect for long press.

  In the present embodiment, when the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect pattern of the decorative symbol variation display according to the received command. To do. Then, in the production by the decided production pattern, production lottery is performed as to whether or not various productions are executed. All the box data of the production contents decided to be executed by the production lottery are read out, the part data contained in the read out box data is stored in the RAM 408, and the liquid crystal command contained in the box data is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. To the second sub-control unit 500.

  As a liquid crystal command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at the start of the symbol variation display, for example, a background command for designating a background, a timer command for designating a variation time, and a pending number are designated. Hold number change command to be held, hold display command to specify the display position and color of the hold icon, notice command to specify the contents of the notice, reach command to specify the contents of the reach to be executed, temporary stop to specify the decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped There are a design command, a final stop design command for designating a decorative design to be displayed when the design is stopped. Here, the timer command includes data that can specify the pre-reach performance time (notice timer) and the reach performance time (reach timer).

  Then, in the second sub-control unit 500, control is performed so that the designated effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, when a predetermined effect display is performed, the second sub control unit 500 transmits a return command to that effect to the first sub control unit 400. When receiving the return command, the first sub-control unit 400 executes control corresponding to the received return command.

  When an effect for continuous hitting is performed during symbol variation, as shown in FIGS. 44 (A) and (B), liquid crystal is transferred from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at the timing a. When the command is transmitted, the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of decorative symbols based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. Thereafter, when the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying the effect for repeated hitting at the timing c, a return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command at the timing d, the part data corresponding to the received return command is read from the RAM 408, and based on the read part data, the sound is output, the lamp blinks, and the effect is movable Control the operation of the bodies 224, 225, etc.

  Thereafter, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also operates effectively. Set the start period. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period at the timing f, the first sub control unit 400 also starts and sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44A, when the effect button 136 is operated repeatedly, the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of A1, and a liquid crystal command to that effect is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of B1 and displays the effect display that the effect button 136 is operated on the decorative symbol display device 208. Done.

  Thereafter, similarly, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of C1 (E1) and a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control In the unit 500, the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of D1 (F1), and an effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44B, when the effect button 136 is operated to be pressed for a long time and the long press automatic hitting functions, the operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of A1, and the liquid crystal command indicating that. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing B1 and displays the effect indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated. Is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained.

  Thereafter, when a time T1 (for example, 500 ms) elapses until a liquid crystal command for automatic hitting is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of C2. When the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of D2, and the effect button 136 is operated. The effect design display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, when a long press operation is performed, the second sub-control unit 500 cannot recognize that the second operation has been performed by the effect button 136 unless at least the time T1 has elapsed since the operation was started. Therefore, when the striking operation is performed, every time the effect button 136 is operated, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. Even before the period of time elapses, the second sub-control unit 500 can recognize that the effect button 136 has been operated, and display more effects that the effect button 136 has been operated than when the long press operation has been performed. Is possible.

  Thereafter, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, each time of E2 (E2, G2, I2... At the timing), the liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated once is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, (F2, H2 , J2... (At each timing), an effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in response to the reception of the liquid crystal command. That is, when a long press operation is performed, the second sub-control unit 500 cannot recognize that the effect button 136 has been operated unless at least the time T2 has elapsed. Accordingly, when the striking operation is performed, every time the effect button 136 is operated, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. Even before the period of time elapses, the second sub-control unit 500 can recognize that the effect button 136 has been operated, and display more effects that the effect button 136 has been operated than when the long press operation has been performed. Is possible.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44 (A) and FIG. 44 (B), when the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation valid period has ended without the operation result effect being executed at the timing g. A return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 also ends the operation valid period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the end of the operation effective period at the timing h, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to end. After the operation valid period is set to end, even if there is a single operation of the effect button 136 and a long press operation, the operation is treated as invalid.

  If the execution result of the operation result effect is satisfied by the continuous hitting operation or the long press automatic continuous hitting function before the timing of g, the second sub-control unit 500 ends the operation effective period. A return command for starting the operation result effect is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the operation valid period is set to end. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command from the second sub-control unit 500, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is also set to end in the first sub-control unit 400 and stored in the RAM 408. The part data corresponding to the received return command is read, and effect control based on the read part data is performed.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period, and a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, but the liquid crystal command is received by the second sub-control unit 500. Sometimes, when the operation valid period has expired, the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is invalid, and an effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed. I will not.

  When an effect for long press is performed during symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), when a liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at timing a, The second sub-control unit 500 receives this liquid crystal command at the timing b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of decorative symbols based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. Thereafter, when the effect display for long press is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing c, a return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command at the timing d, the part data corresponding to the received return command is read from the RAM 408, and based on the read part data, the sound is output, the lamp blinks, and the effect is movable Control the operation of the bodies 224, 225, etc.

  Thereafter, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also operates effectively. Set the start period. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period at the timing f, the first sub control unit 400 also starts and sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing α, but at this time, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is not transmitted.

  After that, when a time T3 (for example, 100 ms) until a liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued at the timing of A3. If a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of B3, and uses the effect button 136. An effect display indicating that the long press operation is being performed is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, when a long press operation is performed, the second sub-control unit 500 may recognize that a long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed if at least time T3 has not elapsed since the operation was started. Can not.

  Thereafter, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, every time T4 (for example, 231 ms) until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted (at timings C3, E3,...). ), A liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 because the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing, and the second sub-control unit 500 (D3, F3) In response to reception of the liquid crystal command (at each timing of...), An effect display indicating that a long press operation with the effect button 136 is being performed is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation effective period has ended without executing the operation result effect at the timing g, a return command to that effect is sent from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 500. While being transmitted to the control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 also ends and sets the operation valid period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the end of the operation effective period at the timing h, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to end. After the operation valid period is set to end, even if the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, the operation is treated as invalid.

  If the execution result of the operation result effect by the long press operation is satisfied before the timing of g, the second sub-control unit 500 ends the operation effective period and starts the operation result effect. Is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 to end the operation valid period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command from the second sub-control unit 500, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is also set to end in the first sub-control unit 400 and stored in the RAM 408. The part data corresponding to the received return command is read, and effect control based on the read part data is performed.

  Next, an operation when the long press operation by the effect button 136 is intermittently performed during the execution of the effect for continuous hitting will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 45A shows a state in which an effect for continuous hitting is performed during symbol variation.

  First, when a liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit at timing a, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at timing b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of decorative symbols based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. Thereafter, when the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying the effect for repeated hitting at the timing c, a return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command at the timing d, the part data corresponding to the received return command is read from the RAM 408, and based on the read part data, the sound is output, the lamp blinks, and the effect is movable Control the operation of the bodies 224, 225, etc.

  Thereafter, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also operates effectively. Set the start period. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period at the timing f, the first sub control unit 400 also starts and sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of A1 and a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 causes the B1 When the liquid crystal command is received at the timing, an effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained.

  Thereafter, when a time T1 (for example, 500 ms) elapses until a liquid crystal command for automatic hitting is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of C2. When the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of D2, and the effect button 136 is operated. The effect design display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the operation of the effect button 136 has been released at the timing β1 after transmitting the liquid crystal command at the timing C2, the first sub-control unit 400 sends the button release liquid-crystal command to the first sub-control unit 400. 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. When the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command from the first sub control unit 400 at the timing of β2, the second sub control unit 500 recognizes that the long press by the effect button 136 has been released.

  Thereafter, when the operation of the effect button 136 is started again at the timing of E4, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, when the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of F4, an effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained.

  Thereafter, when a time T1 elapses until the liquid crystal command for auto-striking is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of G4. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, when the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of H4, an effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, if the long press operation is temporarily interrupted during the operation valid period and then the long press operation is performed again, the liquid crystal is displayed until the time T1 elapses after the long press operation is started, as in the case of the first long press operation. The command is not sent. When the long press operation is performed again during the operation valid period, the liquid crystal command may be transmitted when time T2 has elapsed since the long press operation was started. Further, the liquid crystal command is transmitted when a time different from the time T2 (which may be longer or shorter than the time T2) has elapsed after the long press operation is started again. Also good.

  After that, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the effect button 136 is operated once every time T2 (for example, 100 ms) until a liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 indicates that the effect button 136 has been operated in response to reception of the liquid crystal command. The effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation effective period has ended without executing the operation result effect at the timing g, a return command to that effect is sent from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 500. While being transmitted to the control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 also ends and sets the operation valid period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the end of the operation effective period at the timing h, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to end. After the operation valid period is set to end, even if there is a single operation of the effect button 136 and a long press operation, the operation is treated as invalid. Therefore, even if the time T2 has elapsed at the timing g and the liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated once is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 At the timing of h when the sub control unit 500 receives the command, the operation valid period has already ended, so that the operation is treated as invalid.

  Next, an operation in a case where the long press operation by the effect button 136 is intermittently performed during the long press effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45B shows a state in which an effect for long press is performed during symbol variation.

  First, when a liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit at timing a, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at timing b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of decorative symbols based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. Thereafter, when the effect display for long press is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing c, a return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command at the timing d, the part data corresponding to the received return command is read from the RAM 408, and based on the read part data, the sound is output, the lamp blinks, and the effect is movable Control the operation of the bodies 224, 225, etc.

  Thereafter, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also operates effectively. Set the start period. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period at the timing f, the first sub control unit 400 also starts and sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of α1, but at this time, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is not transmitted.

  After that, when a time T3 (for example, 100 ms) until a liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued at the timing of A3. If there is, a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of B3, and an effect display that the long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when a time T4 (for example, 231 ms) until a long press liquid crystal command is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the operation button 136 is continuously pressed at the timing of C3. A liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, when the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of D3, an effect display that the long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the operation of the effect button 136 is released at the timing of γ1 after transmitting the liquid crystal command at the timing of C3, the liquid crystal command for button release is sent to the first sub-control unit. 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. When the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command from the first sub control unit 400 at the timing of γ2, the second sub control unit 500 recognizes that the long press by the effect button 136 has been released.

  Thereafter, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is started again at the timing of α2, and when the time T3 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted elapses, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued at the timing of E5. A liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of F <b> 5, and an effect display that the long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is assumed that the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued every time T4 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 performs a long press operation with the effect button 136 in response to the reception of the liquid crystal command. The effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation effective period has ended without executing the operation result effect at the timing g, a return command to that effect is sent from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 500. While being transmitted to the control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 also ends and sets the operation valid period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the end of the operation effective period at the timing h, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to end. After the operation valid period is set to end, even if the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, the operation is treated as invalid. Therefore, even if the time T4 has elapsed at the timing of G5 and the liquid crystal command indicating that the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, At the timing when the second sub-control unit 500 receives the command, since the operation valid period has already ended, the long press operation is treated as invalid.

  Next, an example of the effect for repeated hits in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. Here, FIG. 46 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of an effect for repeated hits centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, and FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect for repeated hits centering on the decorative design display apparatus 208 of stepwise.

  FIG. 46A shows a state in which the state has reached the reach state and has been developed into a super reach (a panda group attack reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46A, it is indicated that the “decoration 7” has been reached, and three decorative symbols are displayed in the lower left of the display screen.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), after an effect display is shown in which countless pandas are pressed, an effect button 136 is displayed as shown in FIG. 46 (c). By repeating the hit operation, a character display “defeat all the pandas by hitting the button repeatedly” is suggested, which indicates that the mission may be achieved and there is a possibility that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image that prompts the player to beat all the pandas within the operation effective period by repeatedly striking the effect button 136. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period. Note that the timing shown in FIG. 46D is a state before the operation effective period (first operation effective period) starts, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid. The text “Preparation” to that effect is displayed, and then the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “100 more characters” indicating that the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is 100.

  Then, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing of A1 in FIG. 44 (A), as shown in FIG. 46 (f), the first sub control unit 400 performs the effect on the second sub control unit 500. When the liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 is operated is transmitted and the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing B1 in FIG. 44A, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the liquid crystal command in FIG. As shown, the text display is updated to “98 more characters” indicating that two pandas have been defeated. The remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed so that the gauge decreases with the passage of time. Thus, in the effect for continuous hitting, the effect display in which the number of remaining pandas to be defeated in response to the operation of the effect button 136 may be referred to as an example of the first effect display.

  Thereafter, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing of C1 in FIG. 44A, as shown in FIG. 46H, the first sub control unit 400 causes the second sub control unit 500 to produce effects. When the liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 is operated is transmitted and the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing D1 in FIG. 44 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the liquid crystal command in FIG. 46 (i). As shown, the text display of “72 more characters” indicating that 26 pandas have been defeated is updated.

  Thereafter, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing of E1 in FIG. 44 (A), as shown in FIG. 46 (j), the first sub control unit 400 performs the effect on the second sub control unit 500. When the liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 is operated is transmitted and the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing F1 in FIG. 44A, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the liquid crystal command in FIG. As shown, the character display of “50 more characters” indicating that 22 pandas have been defeated is updated.

  Then, in response to the continuous operation by the effect button 136 being continued, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a display in which the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is reduced, as shown in FIG. 46 (l). The effect button 136 is operated before the operation valid period ends after the update display to the character display of “one more” indicating that the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is one. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 46 (m), the character display of “0 more characters” indicating that all the pandas have been defeated is updated, as shown in FIG. 46 (n). In addition, an effect that the chief character throws up the panda is performed, and it is informed that three “decorations 7” are a big hit. That is, in this effect example, since the execution result of the operation result effect by the continuous hit operation is satisfied, effects as shown in FIG. 46 (m) to FIG. 46 (n) as the operation result effect (first result display). Display is performed.

  On the other hand, when the operation valid period ends without satisfying the execution condition of the operation result effect due to the continuous hit operation, as shown in FIG. 46 (m ′), an effect that the bancho character is knocked out by the panda and lost is performed. At the same time, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be lost. In addition, after the display shown in FIG. 46 (m ′) is performed, a revival effect may be performed and a big hit may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 46 (c) to 46 (m), it is suggested that the mission is achieved by hitting the effect button 136 repeatedly, which suggests that there is a possibility that the mission may be achieved and hit a big hit. The character display “Defeat all pandas” is performed, and a series of displays in which an operation promotion notification image that prompts the player to defeat all the pandas within the operation valid period by repeatedly striking the effect button 136 may be referred to as repeated operation display. is there.

  FIG. 47 shows the same effect as FIG. 46, but shows a state where a continuous hitting operation using the long press automatic continuous hitting function by a long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed.

  47 (a) to 47 (e) are the same as FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (e), and the description thereof is omitted.

  Thereafter, for example, when the operation of the effect button 136 is started as shown in FIG. 47 (f) at the timing A1 (first timing) in FIG. 44B (that is, the length of the effect button 136). When the push operation is started), a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 400 performs the second operation at the timing B1 in FIG. When the sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command, the decorative symbol display device 208 is updated to display “98 more characters” indicating that two pandas have been defeated, as shown in FIG. . The remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed so that the gauge decreases with the passage of time.

  After that, at the timing before the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for auto-striking is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained (for example, timing D1 in FIG. 44A), Since the liquid crystal command from the 1st sub-control unit 400 has not been transmitted yet, as shown in FIG. 47 (h), the display of the remaining number of pandas to be defeated is not updated.

  After that, while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, for example, the timing T2 in FIG. 44B (second timing) has elapsed, and the time T1 has elapsed until the liquid crystal command for automatic hitting is transmitted. Then, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated once is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. Then, the second sub-control unit 500 received the liquid crystal command at the timing of D2 in FIG. 44 (B), and the decorative symbol display device 208 defeated 26 pandas as shown in FIG. 47 (i). The text display is updated to “72 more characters”. As described above, in the present embodiment, the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is functioned as an example of the first time.

  After that, at the timing before the time T2 until the liquid crystal command for auto-striking is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained (for example, the timing of F1 in FIG. 44A), Since the liquid crystal command from the 1st sub-control unit 400 has not been transmitted yet, as shown in FIG. 47 (j), the display of the remaining number of pandas to be defeated is not updated.

  After that, when the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, for example, when the time T2 until the operation of the liquid crystal command for automatic repetitive operation is reached at the timing E2 in FIG. A liquid crystal command indicating that the operation has been performed once is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. Then, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing F2 in FIG. 44B, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has defeated 22 pandas as shown in FIG. 47J. The text display is updated to “50 more characters”. As described above, in the present embodiment, the time T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is functioned as an example of the second time.

  Then, in response to the long press operation with the effect button 136 being continued, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a display in which the number of remaining pandas to be decremented decreases every time T2 elapses. As shown in 46 (l), after a time T2 has elapsed after the update display to the character display of “one more body” indicating that the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is one, the decoration In the symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 47 (m), the character display of “0 more characters” indicating that all the pandas have been defeated is updated, and as shown in FIG. An effect that the character throws away the panda is performed, and it is notified that three “decorations 7” are a big hit. That is, in this effect example, since the execution result of the operation result effect by the continuous hit operation is satisfied, effects as shown in FIG. 46 (m) to FIG. 46 (n) as the operation result effect (first result display). Display is performed.

  On the other hand, when the operation valid period ends without satisfying the execution condition of the operation result effect due to the continuous hit operation, as shown in FIG. 46 (m ′), an effect that the bancho character is knocked out by the panda and lost is performed. At the same time, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be lost. In addition, after the display shown in FIG. 46 (m ′) is performed, a revival effect may be performed and a big hit may be displayed.

  Next, an example of the effect for long press in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 48 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of an effect for long press centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  FIG. 48 (a) shows a state in which it has entered a reach state and has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (a), it is shown that the “decoration 7” has been reached, and three decorative symbols are displayed in the lower left of the display screen. An animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed.

  In FIG. 48B, the duel scene animation continues. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 48C, an effect for long press by the effect button 136 is started. At this time, the decorative design display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (c), before the operation effective period (second operation effective period) starts, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, when the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (d), a “long press” character display for promoting the long press operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. Thereafter, for example, at the timing of α in FIG. 44C (third tying), as shown in FIG. 48E, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is started. The liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is not operated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is used until a time T3 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained. Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (f), the same display mode as in FIG. 48 (d) is maintained.

  Thereafter, when the liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at the timing A3 in FIG. 44 (C) after the time T3 has elapsed, it is shown in B3 in FIG. 44 (C). At the timing, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 48 (g), while the display image of Tono-sama displayed above the display screen is enlarged, the display image of the swordsman is reduced, and Tosama-sama is displayed. The display which produces that it is slightly dominant is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display in which the display image of the swordsman is reduced while the display screen of Tono-sama displayed above the display screen is enlarged may be referred to as an example of the second effect display. In this embodiment, the time T3 until the long press liquid crystal command is transmitted functions as an example of the third time.

  Thereafter, the time T4 elapses while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained. For example, the liquid crystal command indicating that the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued at the timing of C3 in FIG. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, at the timing indicated by D3 in FIG. 44C, the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. While the display screen of Tono-sama displayed above the display screen is further enlarged, the display image of the swordsman is further reduced to display that the Ton-sama is considerably dominant.

  Then, in response to the long press operation with the effect button 136 being continued, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a state in which the display image of Tono-sama gradually expands every time T4 elapses. When the execution result of the operation result effect (second result display) by the long press operation is satisfied, for example, effect display as shown in FIGS. 38 (13) to (15) is performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48C to 48H, the display of the operation promotion notification image that promotes the long press operation of the effect button 136 may be referred to as a long press operation display.

  Next, an example of the step-up effect in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a step-up effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 50 is an example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the continuation step by step, and FIG. 51 is a diagram showing another effect example performed in the effect shown in FIG.

  49, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, the special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, and the general symbol hold. A lamp 216, a fourth symbol LED 285a for special figure 1 and a fourth symbol LED 285b for special figure 2 are shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In response to this, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is also stopped and displayed in the lower left part of the display screen of the ornamental symbol display device 208. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. Further, the 4th design LED 285a for special figure 1 and the 4th design LED 285b for special figure 2 are both turned off, indicating that the display result is lost.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 49 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280.

  In FIG. 49 (1), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and these three hold icons h11, h12, All of h13 are displayed in a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon.

  In FIG. 49 (2), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started and the symbol variation is started in the first special symbol display device 212, but no change has yet occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 49 (3), the hold icon (target hold icon of the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 by the change animation of the hold icon and moved to the change icon h0. Thus, the hold icon that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. 1, and the hold icon that was at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is special. The display moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12 in FIG. 1, and the decorative symbol variation display is also started. At this time, the 4th design LED 285a for special figure 1 starts blinking. Note that the start timing of the hold icon movement animation may be before the start of the decorative symbol variation display, may be simultaneously with the start of the decorative symbol variation display, or the decoration symbol variation may be started. It may be after the start of display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 49 (4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, two “decorations 7” stop and enter the reach state. In the lower left of the display screen, three decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  FIG. 49 (5) shows a state that has been developed into super reach (Echigoya reach). In this super reach, the character display “Secure Echigoya” is suggested, which suggests that there is a possibility of developing into a more reliable reach production by capturing the character of Echigoya during the reach production. This Echigoya reach is a reach including a step-up effect in which the effect for one operation is performed at most three times.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49 (6), when the transition is made to Echigoya reach, the first operation effect (step-up 1 effect) is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a thousand boxes. A state in which the character of Echigoya is being chased by the character of the main character Tono-sama is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image as an operation display prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 within the effective period. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 representing the remaining time of the operation effective period. At this time, an operation waiting animation display is performed on the effect button image 136P1. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (7), before the operation valid period starts, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (8), when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period as shown in FIG. 49 (9), FIG. 49 (10). As shown in the figure, the decoration symbol display device 208 performs an effect that the first operation for the first operation is successful and the second operation for the operation is performed. The effect shown in FIG. 49 (10) is also displayed when the operation button 136 is not operated until the operation effective period ends, but when the operation effective period ends without operation, Different effects may be displayed (for example, after the display as shown in FIG. 51 (a1) described later is performed, the effect as shown in FIG. 49 (10)).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 49 (11), the second effect for the first operation (the effect of step-up 2) is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the Echigoya with a thousand boxes is the main character. The state of being chased by this character is displayed again.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image as an operation display that prompts the user to operate the effect button 136 within the effective period. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 representing the remaining time of the operation effective period. At this time, an operation waiting animation display is performed on the effect button image 136P1. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (12), before the operation valid period starts, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (13), when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period as shown in FIG. 49 (14), FIG. 49 (15). As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect that the effect for the first operation for the second time is successful, and that the effect is shifted to the effect for the first operation for the third time. The effect shown in FIG. 49 (15) is also displayed when the operation button 136 is not operated until the operation effective period ends, but when the operation effective period ends without operation, Different effects may be displayed (for example, effects such as those shown in FIG. 49 (15) after display as shown in FIG. 51 (b1) described later).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50 (16), the third operation for the first operation (the effect of step-up 3) is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the Echigoya with a thousand boxes is the main character. The state of being chased by this character is displayed again.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (17), on the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation promotion notification image is displayed as an operation display prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 within the effective period. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 representing the remaining time of the operation effective period. At this time, an operation waiting animation display is performed on the effect button image 136P1. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (17), the operation valid period is before the start, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (18), as shown in FIG. 50 (19), when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period, FIG. 50 (20). As shown in FIG. 6, the decorative symbol display device 208 is informed that the Tono-sama character has captured the Echigoya character, and thus the third operation for the first operation has been successful. The effect shown in FIG. 50 (20) is also displayed when there is no operation of the effect button 136 until the operation effective period ends, but when the operation effective period ends without any operation, Different effects may be displayed (for example, effects such as those shown in FIG. 50 (20) after display as shown in FIG. 51 (b1) described later).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows the transition to the special reach, which is an advanced type of super reach, because the production for the operation once is performed three times. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to dark display, leaves the decorative symbols displayed in the lower left part of the display screen, and makes other displays difficult to see. As shown in 50 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display indicating that a swordsman reach, which is an example of a special reach, is started.

  Thus, it can be said that the effect for the first operation for the first time is an example of the first continuous effect display in relation to the effect for the first operation for the second time. The second one-time operation effect can be said to be an example of the second continuous effect display in the relationship of the first one-time operation effect, and the third one-time operation effect. In this relationship, it can be said to be an example of the first continuous effect display. In addition, the effect for the first operation for the third time can be said to be an example of the second continuous effect display in relation to the effect for the first operation for the second time.

  51 (a1) to 51 (a3) are diagrams showing an example of effects in another case following FIG. 49 (9). FIG. 51A1 to FIG. 51A3 show an effect example when the first operation effect for the first time has failed.

  FIG. 51A1 shows that the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period in the first operation effect for the first time, or that the Echigoya character escapes after the operation effective period ends. Is displayed. That is, it is notified that the first operation effect has failed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (a2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variably displayed in the lower left part of the display screen temporarily stops at “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” and shakes. It shows how the change is taking place.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51 (a3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” even in the center of the display screen, and it is lost. Informed.

  51 (b1) to 51 (b2) are diagrams showing an example of effects in another case following FIG. 49 (14). FIG. 51 (b1) to FIG. 51 (b2) show examples of effects when the second operation effect for the first time has failed.

  FIG. 51 (b1) shows that the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period in the second operation for the first operation, or the Echigoya character escapes with a thousand boxes after the operation effective period ends. Is displayed. That is, it is notified that the second operation effect has failed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach state by “decoration 7” is formed again, and for example, normal reach is performed. Note that the present invention is not limited to normal reach, and other reach effects other than normal reach (for example, long reach, super reach, etc.) may be performed.

  51 (c1) to 51 (c3) are diagrams showing an example of effects in another case following FIG. 50 (19) in a stepwise manner. 51 (c1) to 51 (c3) show another example of effects when the third operation effect for the first time is successful.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (c1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a state in which the Tono-sama character wears sunglasses and rides on a motorcycle to follow the Echigoya character. The effect shown in FIG. 51 (c1) is for the first operation for the third time after the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period in the third operation effect for the first operation or after the operation effective period ends. Notifying that the Echigoya character has been caught as shown in FIG. 50 (20), but the Tono-sama character has not shown the Echigoya as shown in FIG. 49 (15). This is an effect that transitions after an effect indicating that the player is chasing around continuously, and a premium effect (an effect of step-up 4) that is determined to be a big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (c2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shifts to the full rotation reach, and displays the variation at a low speed while maintaining the state where three identical decorative symbols are arranged.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51 (c3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays a combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” and notifies that a big hit has occurred.

  Next, the relationship between the effect contents and the operation of the effect button 136 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. 52 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of the effect button 136. FIG. 53 shows the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect button 136. It is a figure explaining the relationship with operation | movement.

  In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 is driven by an effect button drive motor 434 in order to improve the effect, and an operable position (first position) that can be pressed by the player, and the player. It is possible to displace between the operation impossible position (second position) where the pressing operation cannot be performed. The operable position is the position where the effect button 136 is most protruded, and the inoperable position is the position where the effect button 136 is most recessed. The inoperable position is, for example, a position where the upper end edge of the flange-shaped flange portion provided at the upper end of the cylindrical button case surrounding the side wall of the button body of the effect button 136 and the upper surface of the button body are flush with each other. It may be a position where the upper surface of the button body is recessed from the upper edge of the collar. The condition for displacing the effect button 136 to the inoperable position is, for example, a case where the pressing of the effect button 136 is restricted in order to operate another effect button. When the button return condition is satisfied after the effect button 136 is displaced to the inoperable position, the effect button drive motor 434 is driven to perform initial position return control for returning the effect button 136 from the inoperable position to the operable position. At this time, for example, the player may be pushing the effect button 136 and cannot return due to the pressing force. As a result, when the drive time of the effect button drive motor 434 elapses, the effect button 136 cannot return to the operable position and remains in the inoperable position. Thereafter, for example, by performing initial position return control every time a return condition such as the start of symbol variation display is established, it is possible to avoid such a situation from being maintained. . In addition, in the state where the production button 136 is maintained in the inoperable position, it is determined that the production button 136 is in the ON state. For example, during the execution of the effect for long press or the effect for continuous hitting, the long press It is determined that the operation is performed, and during the execution of the operation for one operation, it is not determined that the effect button 136 is operated unless there is an operation from OFF to ON. Become.

  52A1 to 52A3 show an example in which initial position return control is performed at the start of symbol variation display.

  FIG. 52 (a1) corresponds to FIG. 49 (1). At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state in which it has not been returned to the inoperable position in the previous symbol variation display.

  FIG. 52 (a2) corresponds to FIG. 49 (2). The effect button 136 is still in an inoperable position. At this time, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the detection state of the effect button initial position sensor 427 in response to receiving the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300. At this time, since the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, it is detected by the effect button initial position sensor 427 that the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, and the CPU 404 acquires the detection result, whereby the effect button 136 is initialized. Determine that it is not in position. Here, the initial position of the effect button 136 is a position after the power-on operation (initial operation) performed when the power is turned on.

  Thereafter, the CPU 404 executes an initial position returning process for returning the effect button 136 to the initial position, whereby the effect button drive motor 434 is driven, and the effect button 136 is set to the initial position as shown in FIG. 52 (a3). Returned. Note that FIG. 52 (a3) corresponds to FIG. 49 (3). The timing at which the initial position return process is executed and the initial position return operation is started may be before the start of the decorative symbol variation display, or at the same time as the start of the decorative symbol variation display. It may be after the start of the decorative symbol variation display.

  52 (b1) to 52 (b3) illustrate an example in which the initial position return control is performed when the Echigoya reach described above is performed.

  FIG. 52 (b1) corresponds to FIG. 49 (10). That is, it is informed that the transition to the effect of step-up 2 is made. At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state where it is not returned while being displaced to the inoperable position.

  FIG. 52 (b2) corresponds to FIG. 49 (11). That is, a state in which the effect of step-up 2 (second continuous effect display) has been started is shown. The effect button 136 is still in an inoperable position. At this time, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 detects the effect button initial position sensor 427 in response to receiving a return command from the second sub-control unit 500 indicating that the effect of step-up 2 has been started. Determine the state. At this time, since the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, it is detected by the effect button initial position sensor 427 that the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, and the CPU 404 acquires the detection result, whereby the effect button 136 is initialized. Determine that it is not in position.

  Thereafter, the CPU 404 executes an initial position returning process for returning the effect button 136 to the initial position, whereby the effect button drive motor 434 is driven, and as shown in FIG. The effect button 136 is returned to the initial position before the operation effective period in the effect is started. That is, the effect button 136 is controlled to be returned to the initial position before the operation promotion notification image is displayed. Note that FIG. 52 (b3) corresponds to FIG. 49 (12). Note that the timing at which the initial position return process is executed and the initial position return operation is started is not limited to the above-described timing. For example, a return command indicating that the operation promotion notification image is displayed is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. The initial position returning operation may be started based on the fact that the signal is received. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial position return process is executed in the effect of step up 2, but the initial position return process is executed in the effect of step up 1, the effect of step up 3, and the effect of step up 4. You may do it.

  53 (a1) to FIG. 53 (a3) illustrate an example in which the initial position return operation is not performed despite the step-up effect in the Echigoya reach described above.

  FIG. 53 (a1) corresponds to FIG. 49 (4). At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state where it is not returned while being displaced to the inoperable position.

  FIG. 53 (a2) corresponds to FIG. 49 (5). The effect button 136 is still in an inoperable position. At this time, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command from the second sub-control unit 500 indicating that the effect of step-up 1 has been started, but the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 stores Since the part data for performing the initial position return operation corresponding to the return command is not set, the effect button 136 remains in the inoperable position without performing the initial position return operation.

  FIG. 53 (a3) corresponds to FIG. 49 (8). As described above, the effect button 136 does not perform the initial position return operation in step-up 1, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (a3), the effect button 136 is displayed while the effect of step-up 1 is being performed. 136 remains in the inoperable position. In addition, when the operation valid period is started, light is emitted in a light emission state that the chance button lamp 138 is operated, but the operation of the effect button 136 cannot be operated as described above. In this case, the chance button lamp 138 may be configured not to emit light in the light emitting mode indicating that the chance button lamp 138 is operated. For example, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off.

  53 (b1) to FIG. 53 (b4) show the effect buttons 136 when the Echigoya character has escaped in the step-up 1 effect shown in FIGS. 53 (a1) to (a3). An operation example is shown.

  FIG. 53 (b1) corresponds to FIG. 51 (a1). At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state where it is not returned while being displaced to the inoperable position.

  FIG. 53 (b2) corresponds to FIG. 51 (a2). The effect button 136 is still in an inoperable position.

  FIG. 53 (b3) corresponds to FIG. 51 (a3). The effect button 136 is still in an inoperable position. Thus, in this effect example, when the first operation effect for the first time fails, the initial position return operation is not performed in the symbol variation display. In this production example, the operation in the case where the first operation effect for the first time has failed is described. However, the first operation effect for the second time and the first operation effect for the third time may fail. Similarly, the initial position return operation may not be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (b4), when the hold is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, the initial position return operation is performed as shown in FIGS. 52 (a2) to (a3). Done.

  In the present embodiment, after the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 performs the initial position returning operation, it is determined from the detection result of the effect button initial position sensor 427 whether or not the effect button 136 is in the initial position. However, when it is determined that there is no, predetermined retry control is performed. Specifically, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is not at the initial position as a result of the first initial position return operation, the CPU 404 performs the second initial position return operation. The retry operation is repeated until it is determined that the effect button 136 is in the initial position, and the effect button 136 is not in the initial position even though the initial position return operation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, the fifth time). If it is determined that there is a problem with the operation of the effect button 136, the effect button drive motor 434 is disabled and the effect button 136 is not driven until the power is turned off.

  In the present embodiment, the production button 136 is displaced to the first position where the button protrudes and the second position where the button is recessed. The position can also be referred to as the first state and the second state. For example, the second position (second state) may be a position further protruding than the first position (first state), and it is difficult for the effect button 136 to harden and be pressed. The effect button 136 may be softened and pressed more easily, may be in a state of vibrating without being pressed, or the effect button 136 may be in the state. In the case where the movable body is accommodated, the state in which the movable body rotates or moves may be the second state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example of an effect when a plurality of buttons are operated at the same time has been described. However, for example, a touch panel is provided, which is applied to a button and a touch panel operated simultaneously, or a non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor. And may be applied to one that operates a button and a non-contact sensor at the same time.

  In the present embodiment, the same button (the effect button 136) is used for the button for performing the normal button operation and the button for performing the long press automatic continuous hitting, but the button for performing the normal button operation is used. A mode in which an effect button corresponding to the operation method is provided, such as providing a button for performing long press automatic continuous hitting, may be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in a single operation effect, an effect may be performed in which a plurality of buttons are operated at preset timings. Specifically, for example, an effect button image 136P1, a right button image 137dP1, and a remaining time display bar 136P2 are displayed as operation promotion notification images, and an icon of the effect button 136 is displayed at a predetermined position on the gauge of the remaining time display bar 136P2. An icon of the right button 137d may be displayed to indicate the operation timing of each button, and when each button is operated at an appropriate timing, such an effect that an operation result effect is performed may be performed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, you may make it perform the production which combined long press operation and 1 time operation. For example, a configuration may be provided in which an operation result effect is performed by pressing and holding the left button 137c to increase the gauge and operating the effect button 136 in that state. In this case, the production effect may be further improved if the production content varies according to the gauge amount at the time when the production button 136 is operated. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect that combines a continuous hit operation or a long press automatic continuous hit and a single operation, or an effect that combines a continuous hit operation or a long press automatic continuous hit and a long press operation. .

  Moreover, you may make it perform long press simultaneous operation effect that operation result effect is performed by performing long press operation with each of two or more buttons, for example, when long press simultaneous operation effect is started, After a display that prompts the user to simultaneously press and hold both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is performed, a display that prompts the user to release the long-pressed button is displayed. As a result, when the long-press simultaneous operation effect is successful, an operation result effect indicating that the operation has been successful is performed. Here, the degree of change in the production (for example, the amount of increase in gauge, etc.) differs between when one of the two buttons requested to be operated is pressed and when both are pressed for a long time. May be. Furthermore, the degree of change in the production may be different depending on whether or not only one button is pressed for a long time and when only the other button is pressed for a long time. Further, the production may not be changed unless both buttons are pressed for a long time. Also, when releasing two long-pressed buttons, make sure that the displayed content is different, for example, if you release only one of the two buttons or if you release both, the effects on the operation result effect will be different. Alternatively, the operation result effect may not be performed when only one of the two buttons is released, and the operation result effect may be performed when both of the two buttons are released.

  In addition, a configuration may be provided in which an operation result effect is performed by performing a continuous hitting operation or a long press automatic continuous hitting with each of two or more buttons.

  In the present embodiment, the buttons constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are provided one by one for each function, but two or more buttons having the same function are provided. It may be configured to be applicable to the embodiment. For example, a configuration in which two effect buttons are provided and three upper buttons 137a are provided, and an effect is provided by simultaneously operating two effect buttons and one or more upper buttons. You may prepare. In addition to the buttons, a production lever that simulates a production lever, a car handle, a motorcycle handle, etc. may be provided so as to be applicable to the above-described embodiments. You may provide the structure which produces an effect by operating simultaneously the button of. Alternatively, an effect dial such as a jog dial may be provided so as to be applicable to the above-described embodiment. For example, the effect is performed by simultaneously operating the effect dial and other buttons. Such a configuration may be provided. Further, a configuration in which a plurality of effect buttons 136 having the same function but different uses may be provided so as to be applicable to the above-described embodiment. For example, a first effect button used in a normal effect and a second effect button used when a special effect is being performed are provided, and the first effect button is operated while operating the second effect button. You may provide the structure which performs the production which raises a feeling of expectation further by operating one production button.

In the above description,
“First operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, a decision button 137e, etc.]
A second operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, a production button 136 or the like];
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
A game machine equipped with
One of the plural types of displays is a volume setting display [for example, a setting screen for changing symbols shown in FIG. 38 (3), a volume setting screen shown in FIG. 42 (e), etc.]
One of the plural types of displays is a first operation result display [for example, the effect display shown in FIG. 38 (12), FIG. 39 (c5), FIG. 41 (i), etc.]
The volume setting display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation of the first operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (2), the right button is displayed during the symbol variation display. When 137d is operated, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG.
The first operation result display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means [for example, in FIG. As shown in FIG. 38, when the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the effect movable body 225 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decoration symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. In the symbol display device 208, an effect display that the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the display contents when the first operating means is operated and when the plurality of operating means are operated can be made different, so that the display variations according to the operation can be increased, and the player You may be able to improve your interests.

  Here, the first operating means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, the first operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the second operation means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, the second operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the volume setting display and the first operation result display, or may be capable of displaying other than the volume setting display and the first operation result display. . The display means may always display the volume setting display and the first operation result display, or may not display the volume setting display and the first operation result display.

  In addition, the volume setting display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the first operation means, or in response to things other than the operation of the first operation means. May be displayed. Further, the volume setting display may be always displayed in response to the operation of the first operation means, or may not be displayed in response to the operation of the first operation means. May be.

  The first operation result display may be displayed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation result may be displayed. There may be a case where the message is displayed in response to something other than the operation of both the means and the second operation means. Further, the first operation result display may be always displayed in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means, or the first operation means and the second operation means may be displayed. There may be a case where it is not displayed in response to the operation of both of the two operation means.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the volume setting display, brightness setting display, display setting display on display means (decorative symbol display device 208, liquid crystal display device, etc.), and character selection for selecting a character to appear in the game. Display, music selection display for selecting BGM, mode selection display for selecting the production mode during the game, and user mode display for entering a password etc. to take over the player's game history can be displayed It may be configured. That is, the volume setting display can be said to be an example of an effect unit that can set a setting value by a setting operation.

  Here, the types of display settings of the display means include, for example, LCD backlight brightness adjustment, color temperature adjustment, black level adjustment (brightness adjustment of black part of video), white level adjustment (video) Brightness adjustment of white portion), color density adjustment, hue adjustment, sharpness (image outline) adjustment, resolution adjustment, and the like. In addition, when the sound output means is configured to include a high-pitched speaker and a low-pitched speaker, the volume adjustment for only the low sound, the volume adjustment for only the high sound, and the balance adjustment for the high and low sounds are also included in the settings for the sound output means. May be.

  Moreover, the display performed according to the operation of the first operation means is not limited to the setting display, but may be an effect display. For example, when two treasure chests are displayed side by side, if the right button 137d is operated, the right treasure chest opens to acquire an item, or the left button 137c is selected when selecting one of the two left and right routes. When operated, it is also possible to perform an effect display in which the left route is selected.

In addition, during the period in which the “first effect [for example, the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d shown in FIG. 38 (6) to FIG. [For example, in response to the operation of both the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, the decision button 137e, etc.] and the second operation means [for example, the effect button 136, etc.] The first operation result display is configured to be displayed [for example, in the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (12), the effect button 136 and When the right button 137d is operated at the same time, an effect display as shown in FIG.
During the period in which the first effect is performed, the volume setting display is not displayed even if the first operating means is operated [for example, the simultaneous operation effect shown in FIG. 38 (6). When is started, the volume setting setting is prohibited, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also described.

  According to this gaming machine, since the volume setting display is not displayed even if the second operation means is operated during the operation of the first operation means during the period in which the first effect is performed, the first effect is performed. In some cases, the player can prevent the player from unintentionally displaying the volume adjustment display and concentrate on the first effect.

  Here, the first operation result display is displayed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the period during which the first effect is performed. Alternatively, it may be displayed in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means in a period other than the period in which the first effect is performed. The first operation result display may be always displayed in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means during the period in which the first effect is performed. In the period during which the first performance is performed, the first operation unit and the second operation unit may not be displayed in response to the operation.

  The volume setting display may not be displayed only when the first operating means is operated during the period during which the first effect is performed, or during the period during which the first effect is performed. It may not always be displayed when one operating means is operated.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second operation result display [for example, reach state rush advance notice image 2071 shown in FIG.
The second operation result display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 34 (g) to (j). , A reach state entry preview image 2071 may be displayed when the production button 135 is pressed during the operation valid period]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second operation result display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the second operation means, or other than the operation of the second operation means. It may be displayed according to the above. Further, the second operation result display may be always displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means, or is not displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means. There may be cases.

In addition, during the period when the “second effect [for example, the effect of displaying the operation promotion notification image 136P shown in FIG. 34 (g) to FIG. The second operation result display is configured to be displayed in response to the operation.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second operation result display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the second operation means during the period in which the second effect is performed, or the second effect may be displayed. It may be displayed in response to a matter other than the operation of the second operation means during the period when the operation is performed. Further, the second operation result display may be always displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means during the period in which the second effect is performed, or the second effect is displayed. In the period to be performed, there may be a case where it is not displayed according to the operation of the second operation means.

  It should be noted that the second operation result display may be displayed when the first operation means is operated in addition to the second operation means in the period during which the second performance is performed, A display different from the result display (for example, a back button display) may be displayed.

  Further, the second operation result display may be displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means during a period other than the period during which the second effect is performed, An operation result display different from the result display may be displayed.

In addition, in the period in which the second performance is performed, the first operation result display is not displayed even if both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated. [For example, as shown in FIG. 43 (f) to FIG. 43 (g), when an effect for operating the effect button 136 is being performed, the operation result is obtained even if the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously. No production or volume change, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first operation result display is displayed even if both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated during the period in which the second effect is performed. The first operation result display may be displayed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in a period other than the period in which the second effect is performed. There may be cases.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a first operation display,
The first operation display is a display related to the operations of both the first operation means and the second operation means [for example, the chance button and the right key shown in FIGS. 38 (7) to (10)]. Etc.]
The first operation result display is a display that is displayed until both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first operation result display may be displayed only until both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation means and the second operation means may be displayed. It may be displayed other than until both of the operating means are operated. Further, the first operation result display may be displayed until both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation means and the second operation means may be displayed. There may be cases where it is not displayed until both of the means are operated.

  The first operation display is displayed during the first presentation, but the first operation display may not be displayed during the second presentation. In this case, when there is an operation of the first operation means and the second operation means, a predetermined operation result effect (for example, a back button effect) may be performed.

  In addition, during the first production, the first operation display may be performed. For example, in the tutorial production performed during the symbol variation display, “If you press the chance button and the right key, The first operation display may be performed at a timing completely different from the timing at which the first operation means and the second operation means can be operated. Further, in this tutorial effect, a display explaining the period during which the back button effect is executed and the operation method of the operation means at that time may be performed.

In addition, “the first operation display is a display that prompts the user to operate both the first operation unit and the second operation unit.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, a “door body [for example, front frame door 106 etc.] is provided,
The door body is provided with the first operating means and the second operating means,
The player can operate the first operating means and the second operating means simultaneously with one hand [for example, a ball provided on the front frame door 106 as shown in FIG. The effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are provided close to each other on the upper surface of the door 108 with a storage tray so that the player can operate the effect button 136 and each button constituting the operation key unit 137 with one hand. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, since there are two operation means at positions that are easy to operate even when performing a launch operation, simultaneous operation of both operation means can be easily performed with one hand, and familiarity with the operation of the operation means. It may be easier for non-players to participate.

  Here, the door body may be provided with only the first operation means and the second operation means, or may be provided with other than the first operation means and the second operation means. Good. Further, the door body may be provided with the first operating means and the second operating means without fail, or the first operating means and the second operating means may not be provided. Good.

  In addition to the first operating means and the second operating means, there may be one that allows the player to operate simultaneously with one hand.

Further, the second operating means is an operating means having a size larger than that of the first operating means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In other words, the second operating means can be said to be an operating means having a wider surface that can be operated than the first operating means.

  The first operating means may be smaller than the second operating means, and the first operating means and the second operating means may be the same size.

Further, it includes “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
The production control unit is a unit capable of executing control related to the operation of the first operation unit when the first operation unit is operated [for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 400 As shown in FIG. 17, the control unit 500 performs control according to the operation of each button constituting the operation key unit 137],
The production control unit is a unit capable of executing control related to the operation of the second operation unit when the second operation unit is operated [for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit As shown in FIG. 17, the control unit 500 performs control in response to the operation button 136 being operated.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the production control means may be capable of executing only the control related to the operation of the first operation means when the operation of the first operation means is performed, or the operation of the first operation means. If there is, control other than the control related to the operation of the first operation means may be executable. Further, the production control means may always execute control related to the operation of the first operation means when the operation of the first operation means is performed, or the operation of the first operation means may be performed. In this case, the control related to the operation of the first operation means may not be executed.

  Further, the production control means may be capable of executing only control related to the operation of the second operation means when the operation of the second operation means is performed, or the operation of the second operation means may be performed. If there is, control other than the control related to the operation of the second operating means may be executable. Further, the production control means may always execute control related to the operation of the second operation means when the operation of the second operation means is performed, or the operation of the second operation means may be performed. In this case, the control related to the operation of the second operation means may not be executed.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the game machine is a slot machine.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Operating means that can be operated by the player [eg, a production button 136, etc.]
Drive means for driving the operation means [for example, an effect button drive motor 434 and the like];
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
A game machine equipped with
The driving means moves the operating means to a first position [for example, an operable position shown in FIG. 52 (a3)] and a second position [for example, an inoperable position shown in FIG. 52 (a1). Etc.], and can be displaced between
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display related to the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation display [for example, operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 52 (b3)]”).
When the operation means is at a position different from the first position at a timing before the operation display is displayed, the operation means may be displaced to the first position. [For example, as shown in FIG. 52 (b2) to FIG. 52 (b3), when the effect button 136 is at a position different from the operable position (initial position), an initial position return operation is performed to perform an operation promotion notification image. The production button 136 is returned to the operable position before is displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the operation means, but according to this game stand, a game stand having a feature in the operation means can be provided.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, it is possible in advance that the operation valid period of the operation means is started by the movable means being the second state being transformed into the first state before the operation display is displayed. The player may be able to grasp.

  Here, the operation means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, the operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the driving means may be capable of driving only the operating means, or may be capable of driving other than the operating means. Further, the drive means may necessarily drive the operation means, or may not drive the operation means.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the operation display, or may be capable of displaying other than the operation display. The display means may always display the operation display, or may not display the operation display.

  The driving means may be capable of displacing the operating means only between the first position and the second position, or the operating means may be moved between the first position and the second position. It may be possible to displace other than between. Further, the driving means may be one that necessarily displaces the operating means between the first position and the second position, or the operating means is displaced between the first position and the second position. It may not be allowed.

  The operation means may be configured to be displaced to the first position only when the operation means is different from the first position at a timing before the operation display is displayed. The timing before the display is displayed may be configured to be displaced to the first position even when the operation means is different from the first position. In addition, the operation means may be configured to always be displaced to the first position when the operation means is different from the first position at a timing before the operation display is displayed. There may be a case where the operation means is not displaced to the first position when the operation means is different from the first position at the timing before the operation is performed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a first continuous effect display [for example, the effect of step-up 1 shown in FIG. 53 (a1) to FIG. 53 (a3), etc.],
One of the plural types of displays is a second continuous effect display [for example, the effect of step-up 2 shown in FIG. 52 (b1) to FIG. 52 (b3), etc.]
In one symbol variation display, both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display may be displayed,
The second continuous effect display is a display displayed after the first continuous effect display,
The operation display is a display that is displayed during the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (a3), an operation promotion notification image is displayed in the effect of step-up 1. Etc.],
The operation display is a display that is displayed during the period in which the second continuous effect display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (b3), an operation promotion notification image is displayed in the effect of step-up 2. Etc.],
When the operation means is at the second position at a timing from when the second continuous effect display is displayed until the display of the operation display is started, the operation means is the first position. [For example, as shown in FIG. 52 (b1) to FIG. 52 (b3), the operation promotion notification image is displayed after the effect of step-up 2 is started. The production button 136 is returned to the initial position, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the player may be able to grasp in advance that the second operation display is displayed in the second continuous effect display.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is known in advance by the displacement state of the operation means that the second of the continuous effect display is displayed, so that the player may have a sense of expectation for the change. .

  Here, the display means may be configured to display only both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display, or other than both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display. Also, it may be configured to be displayable. The display means may be configured to display both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display, or at least one of the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display. Either of them may not be displayed.

  Further, the second continuous effect display may be a display that is displayed only after the first continuous effect display, or may be displayed after a display other than the first continuous effect display. Also good. Further, the second continuous effect display may be a display that is always displayed after the first continuous effect display, or may not be displayed after the first continuous effect display.

  Further, the operation display may be displayed only during the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed, or may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed. There may be. In addition, the operation display may be always displayed during the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed, or may not be displayed in the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed. Also good.

  Further, the operation means is displaced to the first position only when the operation means is at the second position at a timing from when the second continuous effect display is displayed until the display of the operation display is started. In addition to the case where the operation means is at the second position at the timing from when the second continuous effect display is displayed until the display of the operation display is started, It may be configured to be displaced to one position. In addition, the operation means is always displaced to the first position when the operation means is at the second position at the timing from when the second continuous effect display is displayed until the display of the operation display is started. In the timing from when the second continuous effect display is displayed until the display of the operation display is started, the first operation is performed when the operation means is at the second position. The position may not be displaced.

Further, it includes “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
The first position is an initial position [for example, an operable position shown in FIG. 52 (a3), etc.]
The production control means is a means capable of executing control for displacing the operation means to the first position (hereinafter referred to as “initial position return control”),
The production control means is means capable of executing the initial position return control when the operation means is not the first position at a timing before the display of the operation display is started [for example, FIG. As shown in (b2) to (b3) in the figure, when the effect button 136 is not in the initial position before the operation promotion notification image is displayed, the initial position return control is performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, by performing the initial position return operation for “movable means not in the initial position” before the operation acceptance period starts, it is possible to give a misunderstanding that the movable means is not in the initial position. There are cases where it can be prevented.

  Moreover, according to this game machine, since the production control means executes the initial position return control, the control burden on the main control unit may be able to be reduced.

  Here, the effect control means may be capable of executing only the initial position return control, or may be capable of executing control other than the initial position return control. Further, the effect control means may always execute the initial position return control or may not execute the initial position return control.

  The production control means may be capable of executing the initial position return control only when the operation means is not at the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. It may be possible to execute the initial position return control other than the case where the operating means is not at the first position at the timing before the display of the display is started.

In addition, “providing detection means [for example, production button initial position sensor 427] that can detect that the operation means is the first position,
The production control means can execute the initial position return control when the detection means detects that the operation means is not the first position at a timing before the display of the operation display is started. Means
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be possible to accurately grasp that the operating means is not at the first position.

  Here, the detecting means may be capable of detecting only that the operating means is at the first position, or may be capable of detecting other than the first position. Further, the detecting means may always detect that the operating means is at the first position, or may not detect that the operating means is at the first position.

  The effect control means can execute the initial position return control only when the detection means detects that the operation means is not the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. The initial position return control can be executed in addition to the case where the detection means detects that the operation means is not the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. There may be. The effect control means always executes the initial position return control when the detection means detects that the operation means is not at the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. Alternatively, the initial position return control may not be executed when the detection unit detects that the operation unit is not at the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. .

In addition, the production control means is means capable of executing retry control,
The retry control is control for executing the initial position return control again when it is determined that the operating means is not in the first position even if the initial position return control is executed. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the effect control means may be capable of executing only the retry control, or may be executable in addition to the retry control. Further, the effect control means may always execute the retry control or may not execute the retry control.

In addition, “the first position is a position at which the player can operate the operation means [for example, an operable position, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first position may be a position where only the player can operate the operation means, or may be a position where the operation means can be operated by a player other than the player. Further, the first position may be a position where the player always operates the operation means, or the player may not operate the operation means.

In addition, “the second position [for example, inoperable position, etc.] is a position in which the player cannot operate the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the second position is a position where the player can operate the operation means, and may be a position different from the first position.

Further, “When the symbol variation display is started, when the operation means is at a position different from the first position [for example, an inoperable position, etc.], the operation means is displaced to the first position. Configured as
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the operation means is returned to the initial position when performing the effect of returning the operation means to the initial position by performing the operation of returning the operation means to the initial position at the start of the symbol variation display. It may be easier to get started.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a state where the operating means is not in the initial position from being continued in a plurality of symbol variation displays, and to make it easier for a game clerk to determine whether or not a malfunction has occurred. There is.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, when the initial position return operation is performed at the start of symbol variation, when operating in a range that overlaps the range of rotation of the other effect movable body, contact with the other effect movable body is performed. There are cases where it can be easily prevented.

In addition, “the operation display is a display for urging the operation of the operation unit [for example, an operation promotion notification image or the like shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the game machine is a slot machine.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Operating means that can be operated by the player [eg, a production button 136, etc.]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
A game machine equipped with
One of the plural types of displays is a first effect display [for example, the number of remaining pandas to be defeated in response to the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for continuous hitting shown in FIG. 47 (g). Production display etc. that is reduced]
The first effect display is a display that may be displayed in a first operation effective period [for example, an operation effective period in an effect for repeated hits, etc.]
The first operation effective period is a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective,
From the timing when the long press operation is started in the first operation effective period (hereinafter referred to as “first timing [eg, timing A1 shown in FIG. 44B]”) by the operation means. The first effect display may be displayed in response to the long press operation being performed for a first time [for example, a time T1 until a liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted]. ,
In response to the long pressing operation being performed for a second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period, the first effect display may be displayed,
The second timing is a timing at which the long press operation has been performed for the first time after the first timing has been reached,
The first time and the second time are different,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the timing at which the first effect display is displayed can be made different between the time from the timing at which the long press operation is started and the time from the timing at which the time has elapsed, There are cases where the timing at which the performance is displayed does not become monotonous and the player can be entertained.

  Here, the operation means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, the operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the first effect display, or may not display the first effect display.

  In addition, the first effect display may be a display that may be displayed only during the first operation effective period, or may be displayed outside the first operation effective period. The first effect display may be displayed without fail during the first operation effective period, or may not be displayed during the first operation effective period.

In addition, the first effect display may be configured to be displayed only when the long press operation by the operation unit is continued for the first time from the first timing. In addition, it may be configured to be displayed in response to a thing other than that the long pressing operation by the operating means has been performed for the first time from the first timing, The one effect display may be configured to be always displayed in response to a long press operation performed by the operation means from the first timing and performed for the first time. According to the fact that the long press operation by the operation means has been performed for a first time from one timing, it may be configured not to be displayed,
In addition, the first effect display is displayed only when the long press operation has been performed for the second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period and is performed for the second time. There may be cases where there is a case where the first effect display is performed in response to the fact that the long press operation is continued for the second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period. May be displayed. In addition, the first effect display is always displayed in accordance with the fact that the long press operation has been performed for the second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period. In some cases, the first effect display may not be displayed in response to the long pressing operation being performed for the second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period. There may be.

  Also, the first time and the second time may be the same or different, the first time may be longer, and the second time is longer. Also good.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a first result display [for example, an operation result effect shown in FIG. 46 (n) or FIG. 47 (n)],
The first result display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the first operation effective period is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (n). As described above, by operating the effect button 136 repeatedly, an operation result effect in which a bancho character throws a panda is displayed]
The first result display is a display that may be displayed even when the long press operation is performed after the first operation effective period is started [for example, FIG. 47 (n) As shown in FIG. 6, an operation result effect in which the chief character throws a panda away is also displayed by long pressing the effect button 136],
The first effect display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation of the operation means in the first operation effective period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first result display may be displayed even if a continuous hitting operation or a long press operation is performed, so that the player may be able to arbitrarily select an operation method. . In other words, a player who knows that the first result display is displayed even if the user makes a long-press operation or a long-press operation can enjoy the long-press operation. Since a player who does not have a continuous hit operation, a player who knows this may be able to do a little easier. That is, since there is an element that plays a game, participation in the game may be promoted.

  Here, the first result display may be displayed only when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the first operation effective period is started, or the first operation may be displayed. It may be displayed even when the operation means is not repeatedly hit after the effective period starts. The first result display may be always displayed when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the first operation effective period is started, or the first operation effective period starts. In some cases, it may not be displayed when the operation means is repeatedly hit.

  Further, the first result display may be displayed only when a long press operation is performed after the first operation effective period is started, or the first operation may be displayed. It may be displayed even when a long press operation is performed after the effective period is started. In addition, the first result display may be displayed when a long press operation is performed after the first operation effective period is started, or the first operation effective period may be displayed. It may not be displayed when a long press operation is performed after starting.

  In addition, the first effect display may be displayed only in response to the operation means being operated in the first operation effective period, or the operation means may be displayed in the first operation effective period. There may be a case where it is displayed in response to an operation other than the operation. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed in response to the operation means being operated in the first operation effective period, or the operation means is displayed in the first operation effective period. It may not be displayed depending on the operation.

“One of the plurality of types of display is a continuous hit operation display [For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (c) to FIG. Is displayed, suggesting that there is a possibility of being a big hit, and prompting the player to beat all the pandas within the effective operation period by hitting the production button 136 repeatedly. A series of displays in which an operation promotion notification image is displayed],
The continuous hit operation display is a display that prompts to repeatedly hit the operation means,
The first operation effective period is configured to start after the continuous hit operation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there are cases where it can be easily recognized that a continuous hitting operation display is performed to the player.

“One of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display [for example, a display in which the display image of the swordsman is reduced while the display of Tono-sama shown in FIG. ],
The second effect display is a display that may be displayed in a second operation effective period [for example, an operation effective period in an effect for long press, etc.]
The second operation effective period is a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective,
The second operation effective period is a period different from the first operation effective period,
The long-pressing operation continues from the timing (hereinafter referred to as “third timing”) when the long-pressing operation is started in the second operation effective period for a third time [for example, liquid crystal for long-pressing Depending on what has been done, the second effect display may be displayed.
The second effect display is a display that is not displayed unless the long press operation is continued for the third time after the third timing [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (g). The display in which the display image of the swordsman is reduced while the display of Tono-sama is enlarged is not displayed until the time T3 has passed since the operation of the effect button 136, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even when the same long press operation is performed, the timing at which the effect display is displayed differs depending on the effect, so there may be variations in the display timing of the effect display, and the player may be entertained. is there.

  In addition, according to this gaming table, whether the player who is used to the game displays the first effect display or the second effect display depending on the time until the effect display is displayed. May be able to grasp and enjoy the operation.

  Here, the second effect display may be a display that may be displayed only in the second operation effective period, or may be displayed in a period other than the second operation effective period. Good. In addition, the second effect display may be always displayed during the second operation effective period, or may not be displayed during the second operation effective period.

  The second operation effective period may be a period in which only the operation of the operation unit is effective, or may be a period in which the operation other than the operation of the operation unit is effective. Further, it may be a period during which the operation of the operation means is always valid, or the operation of the operation means may not be valid.

  In addition, the second effect display may be displayed only in response to the long press operation being performed for the third time from the third timing, It may be displayed in response to things other than that the long press operation has been performed for the third time from the above timing. In addition, the second effect display may be always displayed according to the fact that the long press operation has been performed for the third time from the third timing, or from the third timing. The display may not be displayed in response to the long press operation being performed for the third time.

“One of the plurality of types of display is a long press operation display [for example, an operation promotion notification for promoting a long press operation of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 48 (c) to FIG. 48 (h)”. Image display etc.],
The long press operation display is a display that prompts the user to press and hold the operation means.
The second operation effective period is configured to start after the long press operation display is started [For example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (c) to 48 (d), the operation promotion notification is made. The operational validity period has started after the image is displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the second operation valid period is started after the long press operation display is seen, there may be a sufficient period of time during which the long press operation can be performed.

  Here, the second operation valid period may be configured to be able to start only after the long press operation display is started, or configured to be able to start other than after the long press operation display is started. May be. Further, the second operation valid period may be configured to always start after the long press operation display is started, or may not start after the long press operation display is started.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second result display [for example, an operation result effect by a long press operation, etc.]
The second result display is a display that may be displayed when the long press operation is performed after the second operation effective period is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second result display may be displayed only when a long press operation is performed after the second operation effective period is started. It may be displayed in addition to the case where the long press operation is performed after the operation valid period is started. Further, the second result display may be always displayed when a long press operation is performed after the second operation effective period is started, or the second operation effective period is displayed. It may not be displayed when a long press operation is performed after starting.

In addition, the first time [for example, time T1 until transmission of the liquid crystal command for automatic hitting] after the first timing [for example, timing A1 in FIG. In response to the operation means being operated again before the elapse of time, the first effect display [for example, in the effect for repeated hits shown in FIG. Indication display etc. that the number of remaining pandas should decrease] may be displayed,
The first effect display is configured not to be displayed until the first time elapses while the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing is reached.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect display may be displayed only in response to the operation means being operated again before the first time has elapsed since the first timing. Alternatively, it may be displayed other than when the operation means is operated again before the first time has elapsed since the first timing. In addition, the first effect display may be always displayed in response to the operation means being operated again before the first time has elapsed since the first timing. There may be a case where the display is not performed in response to the operation means being operated again before the first time has elapsed since the first timing.

  Here, the first effect display may be configured not to be displayed until only the first time elapses in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing. Further, it may be configured not to be displayed even when a time other than the first time elapses in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing. In addition, the first effect display may be configured to be displayed whenever the first time elapses while the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing. There may be a case where the display is not performed after the first time has elapsed in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing.

Further, it includes “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
The production control means is means capable of executing control related to the long press operation in response to the long press operation.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, the control burden on the main control unit may be reduced.

  Here, the production control means may be capable of executing only the control related to the long press operation in response to the long press operation, or may execute other than the control related to the long press operation in response to the long press operation. It may be a thing. Further, the production control means may always execute control related to the long press operation according to the long press operation, or may not execute control related to the long press operation according to the long press operation. Also good.

In addition, it is provided with a symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The first operation effective period is a period started during display of the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other than symbol variation display. The symbol display means may always display the symbol variation display or may not display the symbol variation display.

In addition, 'the first time is longer than the second time,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be possible to prevent the first effect display from being displayed unintentionally.

  The first time may be shorter than the second time, or the first time and the second time may be the same.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the game machine is a slot machine.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 has been described as an example. The present invention can also be applied to an expression pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine may use an enclosed ball as a launch ball, and the payout of the ball may be executed by credit.

  The gaming table of the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to, for example, a spinning machine (slot machine) that uses medals or game balls (pachinko balls).

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if it is the structural requirements contained only in description of embodiment, the modification, or additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to another embodiment, a modified example, or additional remarks.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Production button 137 Operation key unit 137a Up button 137b Down button 137c Left button 137d Right button 137e Decision button 208 Decoration design display device 212 1st special drawing display device 214 2nd special drawing display device 224 Production movable body 225 Production movable body 246 Shielding device 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 First sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
418 Various lamps 427 Production button initial position sensor 434 Production button drive motor 500 Second sub-control unit

Claims (11)

Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Driving means for driving the operating means;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
A game machine equipped with
The drive means is means capable of displacing the operation means between a first position and a second position;
One of the plurality of types of display is a display related to the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation display”),
The operation means is configured to be displaced to the first position when the operation means is at the second position at a timing before the display of the operation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first continuous effect display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second continuous effect display,
In one symbol variation display, both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display may be displayed,
The second continuous effect display is a display displayed after the first continuous effect display,
The operation display is a display displayed in a period during which the first continuous effect display is displayed,
The operation display is a display displayed during a period in which the second continuous effect display is displayed,
When the operation means is at the second position at a timing from when the display of the second continuous effect display is started until the display of the operation display is started, the operation means is the first position. Configured to displace to one position,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
Providing production control means,
The first position is an initial position;
The production control means is a means capable of executing control for displacing the operation means to the first position (hereinafter referred to as “initial position return control”),
The production control unit is a unit capable of executing the initial position return control when the operation unit is not the first position at a timing before the display of the operation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3,
A detecting means capable of detecting that the operating means is the first position;
The production control means can execute the initial position return control when the detection means detects that the operation means is not the first position at a timing before the display of the operation display is started. Means
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3 or 4,
The production control means is means capable of executing retry control,
The retry control is a control that executes the initial position return control again when the operation means does not reach the first position even if the initial position return control is executed.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The first position is a position where a player can operate the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6,
The second position is a position where a player cannot operate the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 7,
When the symbol variation display is started, when the operation means is in the second position, the operation means is configured to be displaced to the first position.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
The operation display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.